WO2023024915A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023024915A1
WO2023024915A1 PCT/CN2022/111677 CN2022111677W WO2023024915A1 WO 2023024915 A1 WO2023024915 A1 WO 2023024915A1 CN 2022111677 W CN2022111677 W CN 2022111677W WO 2023024915 A1 WO2023024915 A1 WO 2023024915A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
physical shared
shared channels
information
harq process
indicate
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/111677
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
张彦清
李雪茹
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023024915A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023024915A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/12Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
    • H04L1/16Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
    • H04L1/18Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/12Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
    • H04L1/16Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
    • H04L1/18Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
    • H04L1/1812Hybrid protocols; Hybrid automatic repeat request [HARQ]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the technical field of communication, and in particular to a communication method and device.
  • HARQ hybrid automatic repeat request
  • the sending end can add redundant data with certain error detection and error correction capabilities to the original data to be sent, and send the original data and corresponding redundant data to the receiving end.
  • the receiving end may decode the original data according to the redundant data, and feed back HARQ response information to the sending end according to the decoding result of the original data.
  • the HARQ response information is an acknowledgment (acknowledgment, ACK), and if the receiving end decodes the original data incorrectly, the HARQ response information is a negative-acknowledgment (NACK). .
  • the sending end may continue to send the next data, or may determine that the original data sending process ends. And if the sender receives NACK, the sender can retransmit the original data to the receiver.
  • the receiving end receives data from the sending end through the HARQ process, and generates corresponding HARQ response information and the like.
  • the receiving end can maintain multiple HARQ processes, and different HARQ processes are used to receive data on different channels.
  • the receiving end needs to indicate which HARQ process is used to receive the receiving end.
  • the base station as the sending end can send downlink control information (DCI) to the terminal device as the receiving end, where one DCI can carry a physical downlink shared channel (physical downlink shared channel, PDSCH) corresponding HARQ process ID.
  • the terminal device receives the PDSCH in the HARQ process corresponding to the HARQ process number according to the HARQ process number carried by the DCI.
  • DCI downlink control information
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device, which are used to reduce signaling overhead in a communication process.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method may be executed by a terminal device, or a chip on the terminal device, or a chipset on the terminal device, or the like.
  • the execution of the terminal device is used as an example in the following.
  • the method includes: receiving control information, the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels, the control information includes a first field, the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels, and the N and The Ms are all positive integers; where, when the N is equal to the M, the first field carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the N physical shared channels A modulation and coding scheme (modulation and coding scheme, MCS); when the N is greater than the M, the first field carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate K second physical
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • the first field carries second indication information
  • the second indication information is used to indicate K second physical
  • the first hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ process information of the shared channel the K is a positive integer
  • the K second physical shared channels are among the N physical shared channels except the M first physical shared channels external physical shared channel.
  • one piece of control information can schedule multiple physical shared channels, and there is no need to use multiple pieces of control information to schedule multiple physical shared channels, reducing the overhead for transmitting control information.
  • the control information can schedule multiple physical shared channels in one time slot, thereby relatively reducing the time delay for scheduling multiple physical shared channels.
  • the terminal device does not need to receive multiple pieces of control information, which is beneficial to reduce the power consumption of the terminal device caused by receiving information.
  • the first field can be used to carry the first indication information, and when N is greater than M, the first field can be used to carry the second indication information, thus realizing the multiplexing of the first field. It can relatively reduce the number of bits occupied by the control information.
  • control information further includes code block group transmission information (code block group transmission information, CBGTI), and the CBGTI is used to indicate the code block CBG for retransmission of the N physical shared channels
  • CBGTI code block group transmission information
  • the method further includes: receiving first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels in the control information; and determining the value of N according to the CBGTI.
  • the terminal device can determine the number N of physical shared channels scheduled by the control information according to the CBGTI in the control information, without complicated calculation, and the determination method is simple. Moreover, there is no need to use the control information alone to indicate the value of N, so there is no need to additionally increase the number of bits occupied by the control information.
  • control information further includes a first row index
  • method further includes: receiving second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used to configure a time-domain resource allocation list, and the The time domain resource allocation list includes at least one row index, and time domain resource information of at least one physical shared channel indicated by each row index in the at least one row index, and the at least one row index includes the first row index: determine the number of physical shared channels indicated by the first row index from the time domain resource allocation list, and determine the value of N.
  • the terminal device can determine the number of physical shared channels associated with the first row index in the control information to obtain the value of N, without requiring the terminal device to perform complicated calculations to determine
  • the way to get the value of N is relatively simple. Moreover, there is no need to use the control information alone to indicate the value of N, so there is no need to additionally increase the number of bits occupied by the control information.
  • the control information further includes the first HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels, and the first HARQ process numbers are used to determine each of the M first physical shared channels.
  • HARQ process number; the first HARQ process information includes: a second HARQ process number, the second HARQ process number is used to indicate the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels; or, the second HARQ process number
  • the offset of the second HARQ process number refers to the offset of the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process number.
  • the second indication information may indicate the HARQ process number, so that the terminal device can directly obtain the HARQ process numbers of some or all of the K second physical shared channels. Or, since the offset of the HARQ process number is generally less than the number of bits occupied by the HARQ process number, the second indication information indicates the offset of the HARQ process number, which can relatively save the bits occupied by the second indication information number.
  • the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels are all retransmissions, and the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels are respectively
  • the MCS used in the previous transmission of the transmission unit is the same, and the transmission unit is a transport block (transport block, TB), a code block (code block, CB) or a code block group (code block group, CBG).
  • the MCS of the last transmission of the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels are all the same, so that even if the terminal device does not obtain the last transmission unit carried by a part of the N physical shared channels
  • the terminal device can also decode the transmission units carried by a part of the physical shared channels of the last transmission according to the MCS of the previous transmission of the transmission units carried by another part of the physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels. This improves the reliability of terminal equipment demodulation.
  • the first field further carries one or more of the following information: at least one of the K second physical shared channels A new data indicator NDI of a second physical shared channel, wherein the NDI of the at least one second physical shared channel is used to indicate that the one second physical shared channel is used for new transmission or retransmission; or, the N
  • the offset of the MCS index of the physical shared channel where the offset of the MCS index is used to indicate that the MCS index adopted by the transmission units respectively carried on the N physical shared channels is relative to the last transmission of the transmission unit
  • the offset of the used MCS index or, the code block group flush information (code block group flush information, CBGFI) of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels, where one second physical shared channel
  • the CBGFI of the shared channel is used to indicate whether the transmission unit carried on the second physical shared channel is soft-combined with the transmission unit transmitted last time.
  • the first field when N is greater than M, in addition to carrying the second indication information, the first field may also carry the NDI of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels, and the N physical shared channels One or more of the information such as the offset of the MCS index of the channel and the CBGFI of at least one second physical shared channel in the K second physical shared channels, so that the first field carries more information, which can be The first field is used to the greatest extent without adding additional fields to carry the information, and the fields corresponding to the control information can be relatively reduced. Moreover, the information carried by the first field is beneficial for the terminal device to better decode the transmission units on the N physical shared channels.
  • the N physical shared channels when the N is greater than the M, and the first field does not carry the offset of the MCS index of the N physical shared channels, the N physical shared channels.
  • the MCS indexes adopted by the transmission units respectively carried on the channels are the same, and are the same as the MCS adopted by the last transmission of the transmission units respectively carried by the N physical shared channels.
  • the MCS indexes used by the transmission units respectively carried on the N physical shared channels are all the same, and are the same as
  • the MCS used in the last transmission of the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels is the same, so that the terminal device can directly use the MCS used in the previous transmission to perform the transmission carried by the N physical shared channels this time.
  • the unit is demodulated.
  • the first field needs to carry less information, which relatively reduces the number of bits occupied by the control information.
  • the method further includes: receiving third configuration information, where the third configuration information is used to configure a first demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS); according to the first DMRS Demodulate the transmission units respectively carried by the N physical shared channels.
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • the DMRSs corresponding to the N physical shared channels may be the same, and the terminal device may demodulate the N physical shared channels according to one DMRS, which relatively reduces the number of DMRSs received by the terminal device.
  • control information further includes third indication information, the third indication information is used to indicate the redundancy versions RV of the N physical shared channels, and the third indication information includes N bits, and when the N is greater than the M, the N bits are respectively used to indicate the RVs of the N physical shared channels.
  • the terminal device can indicate the RVs of N physical shared channels according to the third indication information in the control information, and the N bits can be used to indicate the RVs of N physical shared channels and the RV of one physical shared channel respectively. It only needs to be indicated by one bit, which is beneficial to reduce the number of bits occupied by the third indication information.
  • the method further includes: respectively determining N pieces of first HARQ response information according to the decoding results of the N physical shared channels, wherein any of the N pieces of first HARQ response information
  • a first HARQ response information includes P bits, any one of the P bits is used to indicate a positive acknowledgment ACK or a negative acknowledgment NACK performed by a transmission unit carried by the corresponding physical shared channel, P is a positive integer, and the transmission The unit is TB, CB or CBG; perform spatial binding on the N first HARQ response information to obtain second HARQ response information, and the spatial binding is the P bits in the N first HARQ response information
  • the second HARQ response information includes P bits; and the second HARQ response information is sent.
  • the terminal device can generate a first HARQ response information according to the decoding result of one of the N physical shared channels, and so on, and the terminal device can generate the first HARQ response information according to the decoding results of the N physical shared channels respectively.
  • N pieces of first HARQ response information and after performing spatial binding on the N first HARQ response information, generate second HARQ response information including P bits, which is conducive to reducing the number of HARQ response information sent by the terminal device, and relatively The number of bits occupied by N physical shared channels is saved.
  • the method further includes: receiving fourth configuration information, where the fourth configuration information includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate whether to configure the N first The HARQ response information performs the space binding; the sending of the second HARQ response information includes: if it is determined that the value of the fourth indication information is a first value, the first value indicates that the N The first HARQ response information performs the spatial bundling, and then sends the second HARQ response information; the method further includes: if it is determined that the value of the fourth indication information is a second value, the second value indicates Sending the N first HARQ response information without performing the spatial bundling on the N first HARQ response information.
  • the terminal device can determine whether to spatially bind the N first HARQ response information according to the value of the fourth indication information in the fourth configuration information, so as to flexibly instruct the terminal device to perform spatial binding on the N first HARQ response information.
  • Reply messages are spatially bound.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be executed by a network device, or a chip on a network device, or a chipset on a network device, etc., and can also be executed by a terminal device, or a chip on a terminal device , or the chipset on the terminal device, etc.
  • the method includes: sending control information, wherein the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels, the control information includes a first field, the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels, the Both N and the M are positive integers, and when the N is equal to the M, the first field carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the N physical shared channels MCS: In the case where the N is greater than the M, the first field carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ of K second physical shared channels Process information, the K is a positive integer, and the K second physical shared channels are physical shared channels other than the M first physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels.
  • control information further includes code block group transmission information CBGTI, and the CBGTI is used to indicate the code block CBG for retransmission of the N physical shared channels; the method further includes: sending First configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure the maximum number of physical shared channels that can be scheduled by the control information.
  • the method further includes: sending second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used to configure a time domain resource allocation list, and the time domain resource allocation list includes at least one row index , and including time-domain resource information of at least one physical shared channel indicated by each row index in the at least one row index, the at least one row index includes a first row index, and the control information includes the first row Index, where the index in the first row is used to indicate the number of physical shared channels indicated in the time domain resource allocation list.
  • the control information further includes the first HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels, and the first HARQ process numbers are used to determine each of the M first physical shared channels.
  • HARQ process number; the first HARQ process information includes: a second HARQ process number, the second HARQ process number is used to indicate the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels; or, the second HARQ process number
  • the offset of the second HARQ process number refers to the offset of the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process number.
  • the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels are all retransmissions, and the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels are respectively
  • the MCS used in the last transmission of the transmission unit is the same, and the transmission unit is a transmission block TB, a code block CB or a code block group CBG.
  • the first field further carries one or more of the following information: at least one of the K second physical shared channels A new data indicator NDI of a second physical shared channel, wherein the NDI of the at least one second physical shared channel is used to indicate that the one second physical shared channel is used for new transmission or retransmission; or, the N
  • the offset of the MCS index of the physical shared channel where the offset of the MCS index is used to indicate that the MCS index adopted by the transmission units respectively carried on the N physical shared channels is relative to the last transmission of the transmission unit The offset of the MCS index used; or, the code block group refresh information CBGFI of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels, wherein the CBGFI of one second physical shared channel is used to indicate the Whether the transmission unit carried on the second physical shared channel is soft-combined with the transmission unit transmitted last time.
  • the N physical shared channels when the N is greater than the M, and the first field does not carry the offset of the MCS index of the N physical shared channels, the N physical shared channels.
  • the MCS indexes adopted by the transmission units respectively carried on the channels are the same, and are the same as the MCS adopted by the last transmission of the transmission units respectively carried by the N physical shared channels.
  • the method further includes: sending third configuration information, the third configuration information is used to configure a first demodulation reference signal DMRS, and the first DMRS is used for the N
  • the transmission units carried by the physical shared channel are respectively demodulated.
  • control information further includes third indication information, the third indication information is used to indicate the redundancy versions RV of the N physical shared channels, and the third indication information includes N bits, and when the N is greater than the M, the N bits are respectively used to indicate the RVs of the N physical shared channels.
  • the method further includes: receiving second HARQ response information, wherein the second HARQ response information includes P bits, and the second HARQ response information is the N first HARQ response information
  • the information is spatially bound, the N first HARQ response information is determined according to the decoding results of the N physical shared channels, and the spatial bundling is the N first HARQ response information
  • the bit in the same position in the P bits is obtained by logical AND operation, any one of the first HARQ response information of the N first HARQ response information contains P bits, and any one of the P bits is used
  • the P is a positive integer
  • the transmission unit is TB, CB or CBG.
  • the method further includes: sending fourth configuration information, where the fourth configuration information includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate whether the N first The HARQ response information performs the space binding; receiving the second HARQ response information includes: if the value of the fourth indication information is a first value, the first value indicates the N first HARQ response information performing the spatial bundling, receiving the second HARQ response information; the method further includes: if the value of the fourth indication information is a second value, the second value indicates that the Nth performing the spatial bundling on one HARQ response message and receiving N pieces of the first HARQ response message if the value of the fourth indication information is the second value.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which can be the terminal device in the above first aspect, or an electronic device (such as a chip system) configured in the terminal device, or a communication device including the terminal device The larger device of the device.
  • the terminal device includes corresponding means or modules for implementing the above first aspect or any optional implementation manner.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver module (also called a transceiver unit sometimes), and optionally, the communication device further includes a processing module (also called a processing unit sometimes).
  • the transceiver module is configured to receive control information, the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels, the control information includes a first field, and the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels, Both the N and the M are positive integers; wherein, when the N is equal to the M, the first field carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the N The MCS of the physical shared channel; when the N is greater than the M, the first field carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first hybrid automatic Retransmission request HARQ process information, the K is a positive integer, and the K second physical shared channels are physical shared channels except the M first physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be the network device or terminal device in the above second aspect, or an electronic device (for example, a chip system) configured in the network device or terminal device , or a larger device including the network device or terminal device.
  • the network device or terminal device includes corresponding means (means) or modules for implementing the above second aspect or any optional implementation manner.
  • the communication device includes a transceiver module (also called a transceiver unit sometimes), and optionally, the communication device further includes a processing module (also called a processing unit sometimes).
  • the transceiver module is used to send control information, where the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels, the control information includes a first field, and the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels channel, the N and the M are both positive integers, and when the N is equal to the M, the first field carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the N
  • the modulation and coding strategy MCS of the physical shared channel in the case where the N is greater than the M, the first field carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate K second physical shared channels
  • the K is a positive integer
  • the K second physical shared channels are physical physical shared channels other than the M first physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels shared channel.
  • a communication device including: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store one or more computer programs, the one or more computer programs include computer-executable instructions, and when the communication device is running , the processor executes the one or more computer programs stored in the memory, so that the communication device executes the method in the first aspect or any optional implementation manner, or executes the method in the second aspect or The method in any of the alternative embodiments.
  • the communication device further includes other components, for example, an antenna, an input and output module, an interface, and the like.
  • these components can be hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product stores a computer program, the computer program includes program instructions, and when the program instructions are executed by a computer, the computer executes the following steps: The method in one aspect or any optional implementation, or perform the method in the second aspect or any optional implementation.
  • the present application provides a chip system, the chip system includes a processor, and may also include a memory, for implementing the method in the first aspect or any optional implementation manner, or executing the method in the second aspect Or the method in any optional embodiment.
  • the system-on-a-chip may consist of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic flow diagram of transmitting data using a HARQ mechanism
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of division of transport blocks
  • Fig. 3 is a kind of transmission schematic diagram under time division multiplexing
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a scenario applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of another scenario applicable to the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of time-frequency resource configuration of two physical shared channels provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a process of spatially bundling N first HARQ response information provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a first structural schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a second structural schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram III of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a fourth structural schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal equipment in the embodiment of the present application may be called user equipment (UE), terminal, access station, UE station, remote station, wireless communication equipment, or user device, etc.
  • the terminal equipment is a kind of A device with a wireless transceiver function may be a fixed device, a mobile device, a handheld device, a wearable device, a vehicle-mounted device, or a wireless device (such as a communication module or a chip system, etc.) built into the above-mentioned devices.
  • Terminal devices are used to connect people, objects, machines, etc., and can be widely used in various scenarios, including but not limited to the following scenarios: cellular communication, device-to-device communication (device-to-device, D2D), vehicle-to-everything (vehicle to everything, V2X), machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC), Internet of Things (IoT), virtual reality (VR), augmented Augmented reality (AR), industrial control, self-driving, remote medical, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, Terminal equipment for scenarios such as smart cities, drones, and robots.
  • cellular communication device-to-device communication
  • vehicle-to-everything vehicle to everything
  • V2X machine-to-machine/machine-type communications
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • VR virtual reality
  • AR augmented Augmented reality
  • industrial control self-driving, remote medical, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, Terminal equipment for scenarios
  • Terminals can be mobile phones, tablet computers, computers with wireless transceiver functions, wearable devices, vehicles, drones, helicopters, airplanes, ships, robots, robotic arms, smart home devices, etc.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device is taken as an example for description.
  • the network device in the embodiment of the present application includes, for example, an access network device (or called an access network element), and/or a core network device (or called a core network element).
  • an access network device or called an access network element
  • a core network device or called a core network element
  • the access network device is a device with a wireless transceiver function, and is used for communicating with the terminal device.
  • the (wireless) access network ((radio) access network, (R)AN) equipment includes but is not limited to the base station (BTS, Node B, eNodeB/eNB, or gNodeB/gNB) in the above-mentioned communication system, the transceiver point ( t(R)ANsmission reception point, TRP), the base station of the subsequent evolution of the third generation partnership project (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP), the access node in the wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi) system, and the wireless relay node , wireless backhaul nodes, etc.
  • the base station may be: a macro base station, a micro base station, a pico base station, a small station, a relay station, and the like. Multiple base stations may support the aforementioned networks of the same access technology, or may support the aforementioned networks of different access technologies.
  • a base station may contain one or more co-sited or non-co-sited transmission and reception points.
  • the network device may also be a wireless controller, a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU), and/or a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) in a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, C(R)AN) scenario.
  • the network device can also be a server, a wearable device, or a vehicle-mounted device, etc.
  • a network device in a vehicle to everything (V2X) technology may be a road side unit (RSU).
  • the base station is used as an example for the access network device to be described.
  • the multiple network devices in the communication system may be base stations of the same type, or base stations of different types.
  • the base station can communicate with the terminal equipment, and can also communicate with the terminal equipment through the relay station.
  • a terminal device can communicate with multiple base stations in different access technologies.
  • the core network equipment is used to implement at least one of functions such as mobility management, data processing, session management, policy and charging.
  • functions such as mobility management, data processing, session management, policy and charging.
  • the names of devices implementing core network functions in systems with different access technologies may be different, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the core network equipment includes: access and mobility management function (access and mobility management function, AMF), or user plane function (user plane function, UPF), etc.
  • the device for realizing the function of the network device may be a network device, or a device capable of supporting the network device to realize the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the network device.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the network device as an example for realizing the function of the network device.
  • the physical shared channel in the embodiment of the present application may be simply referred to as a channel, for example, including PDSCH, physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) or physical sidelink shared channel (physical sidelink shared channel, PSSCH) one or more.
  • PDSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • PSSCH physical sidelink shared channel
  • the transmission unit in the embodiment of the present application refers to the unit data carried on the physical shared channel, such as a transport block (transport block, TB), a code block (code block, CB) or a code block group (code block group) , CBG).
  • a transport block transport block, TB
  • code block code block
  • CBG code block group
  • one TB can be used as a transmission unit.
  • a TB can be divided into multiple code blocks (code block, CB), in this case, a CB can be used as a transmission unit.
  • Multiple CBs can form a code block group (CBG).
  • CBG code block group
  • a CBG can be used as a transmission unit.
  • the sender can indicate to the receiver the number of CBGs included in each TB through the maximum code block group (maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock) field included in each TB in the high-level signaling, for example, each TB Includes 2, 4, 6 or 8 CBGs.
  • nouns as for the number of nouns, unless otherwise specified, it means “singular noun or plural noun", that is, “one or more". “At least one” means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more. "And/or” describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there can be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character “/" generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or” relationship. For example, A/B means: A or B. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items.
  • At least one item (piece) of a, b, or c means: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a and b and c, where a, b, c Can be single or multiple.
  • ordinal numerals such as “first” and “second” mentioned in the embodiments of this application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority or importance of multiple objects.
  • first indication information and “second indication information” in the embodiment of the present application may be the same indication information or different indication information, and this expression is not used to limit these two indication information
  • the order of transmission, priority or importance of the transmission is different.
  • indication may be interpreted as an explicit indication and/or an implicit indication.
  • a explicitly indicates B for example, it can be understood that B can be obtained by reading A.
  • B is the HARQ information of K second physical shared channels
  • a explicitly indicates B which can be understood as reading the second indication information to obtain K second physical shared channels
  • HARQ process information of each second physical shared channel in K is a positive integer.
  • indication can also be understood as “include”, for example, the first indication information is used to indicate the modulation and coding scheme (modulation and coding scheme, MCS) of N physical shared channels, and can also be expressed as: the first indication information An MCS including N physical shared channels, where N is a positive integer.
  • MCS modulation and coding scheme
  • “indicate” and “include” may also have different meanings, for example, A indicates B, and it cannot be understood that A includes B, but only that B can be determined according to A.
  • multiple B information of A may include any of the following situations (1) to (4): (1) Multiple B information, one B information corresponds to one A, and the B information corresponding to any two A in multiple A are the same; (2) A B information, and the B information of any two A in multiple A are the same; (3) Multiple B information, one of which The B information corresponds to one A, and the multiple B information may not be exactly the same, for example, at least one B information among the multiple B information is different from other B information; (4) Part of the B information of A, and one B information corresponds to one A, According to the B information of the part A, the B information corresponding to each of the multiple A's can be determined, and the B information corresponding to at least two A's among the multiple A's is different.
  • the HARQ mechanism is a retransmission mechanism that combines a forward error correction code (forward error correction, FEC) algorithm and an automatic repeat request (automatic repeat request, ARQ) mechanism.
  • FEC forward error correction
  • ARQ automatic repeat request
  • the basic principle of the HARQ mechanism can be referred to above.
  • the FEC algorithm and the ARQ mechanism are introduced respectively below.
  • the FEC algorithm is an error control method.
  • the FEC algorithm refers to performing encoding processing on the data to be sent according to a certain algorithm, and adding redundant data to the data.
  • the receiving end decodes the received data according to the corresponding FEC algorithm, and corrects the errors generated during the transmission according to the redundant data and corrects them.
  • the ARQ retransmission mechanism means that the receiving end can judge whether the received data is correct through the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) algorithm, and send the judgment result to the sending end. If the sending end determines that the judgment result indicates a reception error, the sending end can resend the data until the receiving end receives the data correctly.
  • CRC cyclic redundancy check
  • the HARQ mechanism combines the advantages of the FEC algorithm and the ARQ retransmission mechanism.
  • the HARQ mechanism can also support soft combining.
  • Soft combining means that the receiving end can store the received error data in a HARQ buffer, and the receiving end can combine the error data in the buffer with the subsequently received retransmission data to obtain a more reliable The data.
  • Soft combining technology can achieve two kinds of gains, one is the gain of signal energy brought by retransmitting the original bits, where the original bits are used to indicate the data to be sent; the other is sending additional correction data when retransmitting the original bits. Coding gain brought by parity bits, where parity bits are used to indicate redundant data.
  • soft combining can be divided into chase combining (CC) scheme and incremental redundancy (incremental redundancy). redundancy, IR) program.
  • CC chase combining
  • IR incremental redundancy
  • the coded bit set is used to indicate data to be sent and redundant data.
  • the coded bit set for retransmission in the CC scheme is the same as the coded bit set for the initial transmission, and the coded bit set for retransmission in the IR scheme does not need to be the same as the coded bit set for the initial transmission.
  • the sender performs CRC on the original bits used to represent them, generates parity bits, encodes the original bits and parity bits, and obtains a coded bit set. Regardless of initial transmission or retransmission, the sending end sends the coded bit set to the receiving end.
  • the sender can transmit a different coded bit set than the previous one.
  • the receiving end will combine the coded bit set of the retransmission with the coded bit set of the previous transmission.
  • the set of coded bits for each retransmission is called a redundancy version (RV).
  • RV redundancy version
  • the sending end sends data through the HARQ process, and the receiving end receives data through the HARQ process.
  • the HARQ process may transmit data using a stop-and-wait protocol.
  • the stop-and-wait protocol means that the sender stops sending each time a TB is sent, and then sends the next TB after confirming that the receiver has successfully received the TB.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic flow chart of data transmission using the HARQ mechanism.
  • the HARQ mechanism supports the IR solution and the TB is taken as an example for an introduction.
  • Step 11 the sender sends TB0 RV0 to the receiver.
  • TB0 is used to indicate the first TB transmitted
  • RV0 can be understood as the first redundant version of the transmitted TB
  • TB0 RV0 is used to indicate the first redundant version of the first TB transmitted.
  • Step 12 if the receiving end fails to receive TB0 RV0, feedback NACK to the sending end.
  • Step 13 the sender sends TB0 RV1 to the receiver.
  • Step 14 if the receiving end successfully receives TB0 RV1, it will feed back ACK to the sending end.
  • RV1 can be understood as the second redundant version of the transmitted TB, and TB0 RV1 is used to represent the second redundant version of the first TB transmitted.
  • Step 15 the sender sends TB1 RV0 to the receiver.
  • TB1 is used to indicate the second TB transmitted
  • TB1 RV0 is used to indicate the first redundant version of the second TB transmitted.
  • Step 16 if the receiving end successfully receives TB1 RV0, it will feed back ACK to the sending end.
  • the concept of RV is not involved, that is, the coded bit set of each retransmission is the same as that of the initial transmission.
  • the end can retransmit TB0 to the receiving end, and the TB0 retransmitted by the sending end is the same as the TB0 originally transmitted.
  • the CBG-based transmission scheme is introduced below.
  • CBG-based transmission refers to transmission using CBG as a transmission unit. Wherein, one CBG includes multiple CBs.
  • the CBG-based transmission specifically means that the sending end performs transmission in units of CBG, and correspondingly, the receiving end also sends a HARQ response to the sending end in units of CBG.
  • the sender retransmits in units of CBG, which can reduce resource consumption compared to retransmitting the entire TB; in the CBG-based transmission scheme, retransmission is performed in units of CBG.
  • the number of transmissions is relatively less, and the number of HARQ responses at the receiving end is relatively less, so that the signaling overhead can be reduced.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a division of TB.
  • the TB can be divided into four CBGs (CBG0, CBG1, CBG2 and CBG3 in Figure 2).
  • CBG0 includes CB0 and CB1
  • CBG1 includes CB2 and CB3
  • CBG2 includes CB4 and CB5
  • CBG3 includes CB6 and CB7.
  • the sender cannot correctly decode a certain CB, then the sender only needs to retransmit the CBG where the CB is located.
  • the receiving end cannot correctly decode CB4 ("X" in FIG. 2 indicates that the receiving end fails to decode CB4)
  • the sending end can retransmit the CBG where the CB4 is located, that is, CBG2.
  • the base station is used as the sending end
  • the UE is used as the receiving end
  • the maximum number of CBGs included in each TB is 4 as an example to introduce the currently provided methods of indicating the HARQ process.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of transmission under time division duplex (TDD).
  • TDD cycle includes 10 time slots, including 8 downlink time slots (D01-D07 as shown in Figure 3, or D10-D17, where D14-D17 is not shown in Figure 3), and 2 uplink time slots (U00-U01 or U10-U11 as shown in Figure 3).
  • the base station schedules the transmission of one TB on one downlink time slot, for example, TB0-TB5 are scheduled on each time slot of D00-D05, and each TB includes 4 CBGs (such as CBG0-CBG3).
  • the base station sends CBG1 and CBG2 of TB0 to the UE at D00, the UE fails to decode, and the UE decodes all CBGs of TB0 except CBG1 and CBG2 successfully.
  • the base station sends the CBG2 of TB3 to the UE at D03, the UE fails to decode, and the UE decodes all CBGs of TB3 except CBG2 successfully.
  • the UE successfully decodes all CBGs in TB1, TB2, TB4 and TB5.
  • the HARQ response information corresponding to TB0-TB5 is not shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the UE sends the respective HARQ response information of TB0-TB5 to the base station at U00.
  • the base station After the base station receives the respective HARQ response information of TB0-TB5, the base station can schedule the retransmission of CBG1 and CBG2 in TB0 at D12, and schedule the retransmission of CBG2 of TB3 at D13.
  • the current approach may lead to three problems. Firstly, when the base station schedules the retransmission of TB0 and TB3, two DCIs are required to schedule two time slots (such as D12 and D13) respectively, and the signaling overhead of the base station is relatively large. Second, the retransmission of the CBG of 2 TB is scheduled in 2 time slots, and the retransmission occupies too many time slots, which may aggravate the delay impact of data retransmission on data transmission. For example, if the time slot corresponding to TB3 retransmitted at D13 exceeds the air interface delay budget (packet delay budget, PDB), even if TB3 is decoded correctly at D13, the user experience may have been affected. Thirdly, the UE needs to blindly detect multiple DCIs, which will also cause high power consumption of the UE.
  • PDB packet delay budget
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a technical solution.
  • the receiving end receives control information from the sending end.
  • the control information may be used to schedule N physical shared channels, where N is a positive integer, and the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels.
  • the first field in the control information carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the MCS of the N physical shared channels.
  • the first field carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate K second physical shared channels in the N physical shared channels except the M first physical shared channels.
  • the first HARQ process information of the channel, K and M are both positive integers.
  • the control information can schedule multiple physical shared channels.
  • the first field in the control information is multiplexed to indicate the HARQ process information of the K second physical shared channels or the MCS of the N physical shared channels, which relatively saves the number of bits occupied by the control information.
  • the amount of control information to be received is relatively small, which can save the power consumption of the receiving end.
  • the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is applicable to any communication system using the HARQ mechanism, for example, it may be the 5th generation mobile communication system (the 5 th generation system, 5GS), or it may be a sidelink (sidelink) communication system etc., and may also be a hybrid architecture of various communication systems.
  • 5GS the 5th generation mobile communication system
  • sidelink sidelink
  • An example of a communication system to which this embodiment of the present application is applicable is introduced below.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to this embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system includes a network device 401 and a terminal device 402 .
  • the network device 401 and the terminal device 402 can communicate with each other.
  • the network device 401 sends control information (such as DCI) to the terminal device 402, where the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels.
  • the terminal device 402 receives the control information, and determines the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels according to the control information.
  • control information such as DCI
  • the terminal device 402 receives the control information, and determines the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels according to the control information.
  • FIG. 5 is another schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to this embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system includes a first terminal device 501 and a second terminal device 502 .
  • the first terminal device 501 and the second terminal device 502 can communicate with each other.
  • the first terminal device 502 sends control information (such as sidelink control information (sidelink control information, SCI)) to the second terminal device, where the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels.
  • the terminal device 502 receives the control information, and determines the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels according to the control information.
  • control information such as sidelink control information (sidelink control information, SCI)
  • SCI sidelink control information
  • the terminal device 502 receives the control information, and determines the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels according to the control information.
  • Figure 4 or Figure 5 is an example of the communication system applicable to the embodiment of the present application, but the communication system applicable to the technical solution in the embodiment of the application includes but is not limited to that shown in Figure 4 or Figure 5 communication system.
  • RTBC real-time broadband communication
  • XR extended reality
  • AR augmented reality
  • MR mixed reality
  • FIG. 6 is a flow chart of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 4 , and the sending end is used as a network device, and the receiving end is used as a terminal device as an example.
  • the network device sends first configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the first configuration information from the network device.
  • the first configuration information is used to configure the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels.
  • the network device may send the first configuration information to the terminal device when establishing a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) connection with the terminal device.
  • the first configuration information is sent in a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) message, or may also be sent in other messages.
  • the first configuration information may be PDSCH configuration information element (PDSCH-Config information element) information in RRC, and the network device may retransmit the schedulable physical shared channel through the DCI maximum retransmission in the PDSCH-Config information element in the RRC message
  • the number of (maxNrofRetransmissionScheduledByDCI) signaling configures the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels for the terminal device.
  • maxNrofRetransmissionScheduledByDCI is nL, indicating that the DCI can schedule a maximum of L physical shared channels in one time slot, and L is a positive integer.
  • the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels is L, which means that the number of schedulable physical shared channels in one DCI is less than or equal to L.
  • S601 is an example in which the network device configures the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels for the terminal device, but actually there are multiple ways for the terminal device to obtain the number.
  • the terminal device may be pre-configured with the number, or the number may also be specified in the protocol.
  • the network device sends second configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the second configuration information from the network device.
  • the second configuration information is used to configure the time domain resource list.
  • the network device may pre-configure respective time domain resources of at least one physical shared channel for the terminal device.
  • the network device may configure time-domain resource information of at least one physical shared channel for the terminal device through the second configuration information.
  • the network device may send the second configuration information to the terminal device when establishing an RRC connection with the terminal device.
  • the second configuration information may include a time domain resource allocation list (time domain allocation list), the time domain resource allocation list includes at least one row index (row index), and includes at least one row index indicated by each row index Time-domain resource information of at least one physical shared channel, in other words, one row index may correspond to multiple physical shared channels, and each physical shared channel has its corresponding time-domain resource information. At least one physical shared channel refers to a scheduled physical shared channel.
  • the time-domain resource allocation list further includes a time-domain position of a demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS) of at least one physical shared channel and a mapping type (mapping type) of at least one physical shared channel.
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • mapping type includes type A and type B.
  • the mapping method of type A is used for the physical shared channel of time-slot scheduling.
  • the starting symbol of the physical shared channel of the slot-type scheduling is usually located in the first 4 symbols of a slot , and the number of symbols occupied by the physical shared channel of the slot-type scheduling can be 3-14 symbols, and the DMRS of the physical shared channel of the slot-type scheduling can be located on the second or third symbol of a time slot .
  • Type B is used for the physical shared channel of non-slotted scheduling.
  • the start symbol of the physical shared channel of non-slotted scheduling can be It is any symbol on the 0-12th symbol in the slot, and the number of symbols occupied by the physical shared channel of non-slot scheduling can be 2, 4 or 7 symbols.
  • the DMRS of the physical shared channel of non-slot scheduling Can be located on the first symbol of a slot.
  • each physical shared channel in the multiple physical shared channels has its corresponding DMRS, and the time domain positions of the DMRSs of different physical shared channels in the multiple physical shared channels Can be the same or different.
  • the mapping types of different physical shared channels in at least one physical shared channel may be the same.
  • the time-domain resource information of one physical shared channel in the at least one physical shared channel may include a time slot offset, start symbol information, and symbol number.
  • the time-domain resource information of each physical shared channel in at least one physical shared channel includes a time slot offset, a start symbol, and a number of symbols.
  • the time slot offset included in the time domain resource information of a physical shared channel may indicate the time slot occupied by the physical shared channel relative to the time slot occupied by the control information used to schedule at least one physical shared channel. quantity.
  • the start symbol information included in the time-domain resource information of a physical shared channel may indicate the start symbol of the occupied time slot of the physical shared channel.
  • the number of symbols included in the time-domain resource information of a physical shared channel may indicate the number of symbols that the physical shared channel occupies in one time slot.
  • a time domain resource allocation list is shown in Table 1 below.
  • K 0 represents the time slot offset of the PDSCH (the time slot offsets of the two PDSCHs are the same).
  • S 0 represents the start symbol information of one of the PDSCHs (that is, PDSCH0) among the two PDSCHs, L 0 represents the number of symbols of the PDSCH0;
  • S 1 represents the start symbol information of the other PDSCH (that is, PDSCH1) among the two PDSCHs , L 1 represents the symbol number of the PDSCH1.
  • a time-domain resource allocation list may also be shown in Table 2 below.
  • each of the row indexes 1 to 6 in the above Table 2 indicates the respective time domain resource information of PDSCH0 and PDSCH1, but each row index of row indexes 7 and 8 only Indicates the time domain resource information of PDSCH0, but does not include the time domain resource information of PDSCH1.
  • the time-domain resource information of each physical shared channel in the first part of the at least one physical shared channel includes a time slot offset, start symbol information, and symbol number.
  • the time-domain resource information of each physical shared channel in the second part of the at least one physical shared channel includes a time slot offset and a number of symbols.
  • the first part of physical shared channels may include one or more physical shared channels
  • the second part of physical shared channels may also include one or more physical shared channels.
  • the first part of physical shared channels and the second part of physical shared channels may be all physical shared channels in at least one physical shared channel, or may be part of physical shared channels in at least one physical shared channel.
  • the start symbol information of the physical shared channel B in the second part of the physical shared channels may be determined according to the start symbol information and the number of symbols of the physical shared channel A in the first part of the physical shared channels.
  • the start symbol of physical shared channel B is the next symbol of the end symbol of physical shared channel A.
  • the ending symbol of the physical shared channel A may be determined according to the starting symbol information and the number of symbols of the physical shared channel A.
  • the first part of the physical shared channel includes PDSCH0
  • the start symbol of PDSCH0 is the second symbol in a time slot
  • the number of occupied symbols is 3.
  • the second part of the physical shared channel includes PDSCH1
  • the start symbol of PDSCH1 may be the next symbol of the end symbol of PDSCH0, that is, the fifth symbol in the time slot.
  • the second configuration information is directly carried in the RRC message, for example, the second configuration information is PDSCH time domain resource allocation list information element (PDSCH-timedomainallocationlist information element) information.
  • the PDSCH time domain resource allocation addition (PDSCH-ToAddTimeDomainResourceAlloaction-r18) information in the PDSCH-timedomainallocationlist information element information configures the time domain resource allocation list.
  • the time domain resource information of the first part of the physical shared channel in at least one physical shared channel through the PDSCH-timedomainallocationlist information element, and configure the second part of the physical shared channel in the at least one physical shared channel through PDSCH-ToAddTimeDomainResourceAlloaction-r18 Time domain resource information.
  • S602 is an example in which the network device configures the time-domain resource allocation list for the terminal device, but actually there are multiple ways for the terminal device to obtain the time-domain resource allocation list.
  • the terminal device may be preconfigured with the time-domain resource allocation list, or the time-domain resource allocation list may also be predefined by a protocol.
  • the first configuration information and the second configuration information may be sent in the same message, and the first configuration information and the second configuration information may also be sent in different messages, and the types of the two messages may be the same, for example , both the first configuration information and the second configuration information are sent through RRC messages, or the types of the two messages are different, for example, the first configuration information is sent through RRC messages, and the second configuration information is sent through media access control (media access control) , MAC) control element (control element, CE) message sending, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • media access control media access control
  • MAC control element
  • the network device may perform S601 first and then S602, or the network device may perform S601 and S602 at the same time, or the network device may perform S602 first and then S601, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device sends control information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the control information from the network device.
  • the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels including M first physical shared channels.
  • the first field in the control information carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate N Modulation and coding scheme (MCS) of a physical shared channel.
  • MCS Modulation and coding scheme
  • the first field carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate first HARQ process information of K second physical shared channels.
  • N is less than or equal to the value of L mentioned above.
  • control information is, for example, DCI. If the control information is used to schedule downlink data, the control information may be DCI1_0, DCI1_1 and DCI1_2. If the control information is used to schedule uplink data, the control information may be DCI0_0, DCI0_1 and DCI0_2.
  • the control information includes a first field.
  • the control information is DCI
  • the first field may include the MCS field in the DCI, or may also include other fields in the DCI except the MCS field.
  • the first field may also be a newly added field in the DCI of the 3GPP protocol version, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the control information can schedule retransmission or new transmission of N physical shared channels.
  • the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels, and M is a positive integer.
  • the value of M is a preset value, and the value of M may be pre-configured in the network device or specified by a protocol. In addition, the value of M may also be preconfigured in the terminal device. For example, the value of M is 1.
  • the N physical shared channels may also include K second physical shared channels, where K is a positive integer.
  • K is a positive integer.
  • the first physical shared channel and the second physical shared channel belong to the same type of physical shared channel, for example, both the first physical shared channel and the second physical shared channel are PDSCH, or the first physical shared channel and Both the second physical shared channels are PUSCH.
  • both the first physical shared channel and the second physical shared channel are PSSCHs.
  • N is equal to M.
  • the first field may carry the first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate or include the MCSs of the N physical shared channels.
  • the first indication information is used to indicate the MCS of the physical shared channel.
  • the first indication information may respectively indicate the MCS of each physical shared channel in the N physical shared channels.
  • the first indication information may only indicate the MCS of any one of the N physical shared channels, which saves the first The number of bits occupied by the indication information, or, even if the MCSs of any two physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels are the same, the first indication information may respectively indicate the respective MCSs of the N physical shared channels.
  • the control information may also include the third HARQ process number.
  • the third HARQ process number is used to determine the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels.
  • the third HARQ process number may indicate or include the HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels.
  • the third HARQ process number may indicate or include the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels, for example, the third HARQ process number indicates the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels in an explicit manner.
  • the third HARQ process number may indicate or include the HARQ process number of the first part of the N physical shared channels, for example, the first HARQ process number explicitly indicates the first part of the N physical shared channels.
  • the HARQ process ID of the channel In this case, the HARQ process numbers of the second part of the physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels may be determined according to the HARQ process numbers of the first part of the physical shared channels and the first rule.
  • the first rule is used to indicate the strategy for determining the HARQ process number of another part of the N physical shared channels.
  • the first rule is to determine the HARQ process number of the first part of the physical shared channel according to the first incremental step value Increment the maximum process number in .
  • the first rule may be specified by the protocol, or pre-configured in the terminal device.
  • the value of the first incremental step value may be specified by the protocol, or pre-configured in the terminal device.
  • the value of M is 3, the value of the first incremental step is 1, and the M first physical shared channels are physical shared channel A, physical shared channel B, and physical shared channel C, respectively.
  • the physical shared channel A belongs to the first part of the physical shared channel, and the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel A is 1; the physical shared channel B and the physical shared channel C belong to the second part of the physical shared channel, and the value of the first incremental step value is 1 .
  • the HARQ process numbers of physical shared channel B and physical shared channel C are obtained by incrementing the HARQ process number of physical shared channel A by 1.
  • the HARQ process number of physical shared channel B is 2, and the HARQ process number of physical shared channel B The number is 3.
  • the third HARQ process number may be carried by the second field included in the control information.
  • the second field and the first field can be the same field, for example, both are MCS fields; or, the second field and the first field can also be different fields, for example, the first field is an MCS field, and the second field is the HARQ field.
  • control information may further include third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate or include RVs of N physical shared channels, where the third indication information includes N bits.
  • the third indication information includes 1 bit, which can indicate the RV of the physical shared channel; if N is greater than 1, and N physical shared channels do not share the RV, then the third indication information N bits can respectively indicate the RV of N physical shared channels, that is, one bit is used to indicate the RV of one physical shared channel, or, if N is greater than 1, and N physical shared channels can share the RV, the third indication information N bits can indicate the RV of any physical shared channel, and the values of the N bits are different, and the third indication information can respectively indicate multiple RVs of a physical shared channel. In this case, since the N physical shared channels is a shared RV, so it is equivalent to that the third indication information indicates the RV of each physical shared channel in the N physical shared channels.
  • the corresponding RVs of at least one physical shared channel may also be different.
  • the network device may determine the value of the third indication information from the first correspondence according to the respective RVs of the N physical shared channels currently to be scheduled.
  • the terminal device may also determine the respective RVs of the N physical shared channels from the first correspondence according to the value of the third indication information.
  • the RV indicated by the 2 bits in the third indication information may refer to Table 3.
  • the network device determines that the RV corresponding to the two physical shared channels is 3, it may determine that the value of the third indication information is 11.
  • the terminal device may determine from Table 2 that the RVs of the two physical shared channels are both 3 according to the value of the third indication information.
  • N is greater than M, it means that the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels and K second physical shared channels, and the first field may carry the second indication information.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate or include first HARQ process information of the K second physical shared channels.
  • the first HARQ process information is used to determine the HARQ process number of each second physical shared channel in the K second physical shared channels.
  • the control information further includes first HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels, and the first HARQ process numbers are used to indicate or include the HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels.
  • the first HARQ information may be carried by the second field included in the control information, and the meaning of the second field may refer to the foregoing.
  • the first HARQ process information may include the second HARQ process number or the offset of the second HARQ process number, and the second HARQ process number and the offset of the second HARQ process number will be introduced respectively below.
  • the second HARQ process numbers included in the first HARQ process information may be used to indicate or include the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels.
  • the second HARQ process number may indicate or include the HARQ process number of the second physical shared channel.
  • the second HARQ process number may indicate or include the respective HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels, for example, the second HARQ process number explicitly indicates the respective HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels HARQ process ID.
  • the second HARQ process number may indicate or include the HARQ process numbers of the third part of the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels.
  • the HARQ process numbers of the fourth part of the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels may be determined according to the HARQ process numbers of any second physical shared channels in the third part of the second physical shared channels.
  • the third part of the second physical shared channels may include one or more second physical shared channels, and the fourth part of the physical shared channels may also include one or more second physical shared channels.
  • the third part of the second physical shared channel and the fourth part of the second physical shared channel may be all the physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels, or may be part of the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels. shared channel.
  • the HARQ process numbers of the fourth part of the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels may be determined according to the third part of the second physical shared channels and the second rule.
  • the second rule is, for example, to increment the corresponding maximum HARQ process number in the third part of the second physical shared channel according to the second increment step value.
  • the second rule and the first rule may be the same or different.
  • the meaning of the second rule can refer to the meaning of the first rule.
  • the values of the second incremental step value and the first incremental step value may be the same or different. For the setting method of the second incremental step value, please refer to the above.
  • the offset of the second HARQ process number included in the first HARQ process information may indicate or include the offset of the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process number.
  • the offset of the second HARQ process number indicates or includes the offset of the HARQ process number of the second physical shared channel relative to the first HARQ process number.
  • the offset of the second HARQ process number may indicate or include the HARQ process number of a second physical shared channel relative to the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel offset.
  • the target first physical shared channel is, for example, the first physical shared channel that satisfies the first condition among the multiple first physical shared channels
  • the first condition is, for example, that the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel is that the multiple first physical shared channels
  • the HARQ process number with the largest value among the HARQ process numbers, or the first condition is, for example, that the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel is the HARQ process number with the smallest value among multiple first physical shared channels.
  • M first physical shared channels include physical shared channel A and physical shared channel B
  • the HARQ process number corresponding to physical shared channel A is 3
  • the HARQ process number corresponding to physical shared channel B is 4
  • the K second physical shared channels The channel includes a physical shared channel C
  • the target first physical shared channel is a physical shared channel B
  • the offset of the second HARQ process number includes the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel C relative to the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel
  • the offset is 3, so the terminal device can determine that the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel C is 7 according to the offset of the second HARQ process number.
  • the offset of the HARQ process number may indicate or include the relative value of each HARQ process number in the HARQ process numbers of the fifth part of the second physical shared channel in the K second physical shared channels Offset from the first HARQ process number.
  • the offset of the second HARQ process number includes the offset of the HARQ process numbers of all the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process number. The above two cases of the offset of the HARQ process number are respectively introduced below.
  • the fifth part of the second physical shared channels may include one or more second physical shared channels, and the fifth part of the second physical shared channels is a part of the K second physical shared channels.
  • the fifth part of the second physical shared channel may or may not be completely the same as the third part of the aforementioned second physical shared channel. Not exactly the same. It can be understood that at least one of the second physical shared channels included in the fifth part is different from the second physical shared channels included in the second physical shared channel in the third part.
  • the offset of the second HARQ process ID indicates or includes offsets of the HARQ process IDs of the fifth part of the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process ID.
  • the offset of the second HARQ process number indicates or includes the fifth part of the second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels The offsets of the HARQ process numbers of the channels relative to the HARQ process numbers of the first physical shared channel.
  • the HARQ process number of the first HARQ process number including the physical shared channel A is 2
  • the K second physical shared channels include the physical shared channel B, the physical shared channel C and the physical shared channel D, and the fifth part of the second physical shared channel
  • the physical shared channel B and the physical shared channel C are included, and the offsets of the second HARQ process numbers are 2 and 3 respectively.
  • the terminal device can determine the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel B as 4 and the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel C as 5 according to the offset between the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number .
  • the offset of the HARQ process number may indicate or include the fifth part of the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels. Offsets of the HARQ process numbers of the shared channel relative to the HARQ process numbers of the target first physical shared channel among the multiple first physical shared channels. For the meaning of the target first physical shared channel, refer to the foregoing.
  • the HARQ process number of the sixth part of the second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels can be determined according to the HARQ process number of the fifth part of the second physical shared channel and the third rule.
  • the third rule is, for example, , according to the third increment step value, increment the maximum process number among the HARQ process numbers of the fifth part of the second physical shared channel.
  • the content of the third rule may refer to the content of the first rule above, and the content of the third incremental step value may refer to the content of the first incremental step value above.
  • the sixth part of physical shared channels may also include one or more second physical shared channels.
  • the fifth part of the second physical shared channel and the sixth part of the second physical shared channel may be all the physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels, or may be part of the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels. shared channel.
  • the sixth part of the second physical shared channel may or may not be completely the same as the foregoing fourth part of the second physical shared channel. For meanings that are not exactly the same, please refer to the previous text.
  • the first HARQ process number includes the HARQ process number 2 of the physical shared channel A and the HARQ process number 3 of the physical shared channel B
  • the fifth part of the second physical shared channel in the K second physical shared channels includes the physical shared channel channel C and physical shared channel D
  • the offset of the second HARQ process number includes an offset of 4 between the physical shared channel C and the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel (for example, physical shared channel A).
  • the third rule is to increment the maximum process number among the HARQ process numbers of the fifth part of the second physical shared channel according to the third increment step value (for example, 1).
  • the terminal device After receiving the control information, the terminal device can determine the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel C as 6 according to the offset between the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number, and the terminal device can determine the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel C The number is incremented, so that the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel D is determined to be 7.
  • the offset of the HARQ process number indicates or includes the offsets of the HARQ process numbers of all the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process number.
  • the offset of the HARQ process number may indicate or include all the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels.
  • the HARQ process IDs of the HARQ process IDs are respectively relative to the offsets of the HARQ process IDs of the first physical shared channel.
  • the HARQ process number of the first HARQ process number including the physical shared channel A is 2
  • the K second physical shared channels include the physical shared channel B and the physical shared channel C
  • the offsets of the second HARQ process numbers are respectively 2 and 3.
  • the terminal device can determine the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel B as 4 and the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel C as 5 according to the offset between the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number .
  • the offset of the HARQ process number indicates or includes all the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels Offsets of the HARQ process numbers relative to the HARQ process numbers of the target first physical shared channel among the multiple first physical shared channels.
  • the first HARQ process number includes the HARQ process number 2 of the physical shared channel A and the HARQ process number 3 of the physical shared channel B
  • the K second physical shared channels include the physical shared channel C and the physical shared channel D
  • the first The offsets of the two HARQ process numbers are 4 and 5 respectively
  • the target first physical shared channel is the physical shared channel B.
  • the terminal device can determine the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel C as 7 and the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel D as 8 according to the offset between the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number .
  • the first field may further carry one or more of the following 1 to 3.
  • the NDI of one of the second physical shared channels is used to indicate that the second physical shared channel is used for new transmission or retransmission.
  • the first field may carry the NDI of each second physical shared channel in the seventh part of the K second physical shared channels, the eighth part of the K second physical shared channels
  • the NDI of the second physical shared channel may be the same as the NDI of any second physical shared channel in the seventh part of the second physical shared channel.
  • the seventh part of second physical shared channels may include one or more second physical shared channels
  • the eighth part of physical shared channels may also include one or more second physical shared channels.
  • the seventh part of the second physical shared channel and the fourth part of the second physical shared channel may be all the physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels, or may be part of the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels. shared channel.
  • the second physical shared channel in the seventh part may be the same as the second physical shared channel in the third part above, or may not be completely the same, and the second physical shared channel in the eighth part may be the same as the second physical shared channel in the fourth part above, or Not exactly the same.
  • control information may further include the NDI of at least one first physical shared channel among the M first physical shared channels, and the NDI of the at least one first physical shared channel may be carried in the third field included in the control information.
  • the third field and the first field may be the same field, or the third field and the first field may be different fields.
  • the first field is the MCS field
  • the third field is the NDI field.
  • the NDIs of the N physical shared channels are all the same.
  • the first field may not need to carry the NDI of at least one of the K second physical shared channels.
  • the third field still needs to carry at least one NDI of the first physical shared channel.
  • the offsets of the MCS indexes of the N physical shared channels may only indicate or include one MCS index offset.
  • the offset of the MCS index can be understood as the offset between the MCS index used by the transmission unit carried by any physical shared channel and the MCS index used in the last transmission of the transmission unit.
  • the offset of the MCS index may indicate or include the offset of the N MCS indices.
  • the offset of one MCS index refers to the offset between the MCS index used by the transmission unit carried by one of the N physical shared channels and the MCS index used for the last transmission of the transmission unit.
  • the last transmission refers to the last transmission of the TB0.
  • the control information schedules retransmission of TBO for the first time on a physical shared channel
  • the last transmission may be a new transmission of TBO.
  • the control information schedules the second retransmission of TBO on a physical shared channel
  • the last transmission may be the first retransmission of TBO.
  • the last transmission of the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels uses the same MCS.
  • the adopted MCS demodulates a certain physical shared channel.
  • the CBGFI of one of the second physical shared channels is used to indicate whether the transmission unit carried on the second physical shared channel is soft-combined with the transmission unit transmitted last time.
  • the meaning and method of soft merger can be referred to above.
  • the first field may also carry CBGFI of at least one second physical shared channel among the aforementioned K second physical shared channels.
  • the network device may also configure whether to enable the CBGFI field for the terminal device through the fifth configuration information. If the terminal device enables the CBGFI field, the CBGFI in the control information may carry the CBGFI of at least one first physical shared channel among the M first physical shared channels.
  • the network device may indicate to the terminal device whether to enable the CBGFI field through the code block group flush indication (codeBlockGroupFlushIndicator) signaling in the PDSCH-CodeBlockGroupTransmission signaling of the RRC message.
  • codeBlockGroupFlushIndicator code block group flush indication
  • the value of the CBGFI signaling is 1, which instructs the terminal device to enable the CBGFI field.
  • the first field may carry the CBGFI of the ninth part of the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels.
  • the CBGFI of the tenth part of the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels may be the same as the CBGFI of the ninth part of the second physical shared channels.
  • the first field may carry the CBGFIs of the K second physical shared channels.
  • the tenth part of the second physical shared channel and the ninth part of the second physical shared channel may be part of the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels, or may be all the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels.
  • the second physical shared channel in the ninth part may be the same as or not completely the same as the third physical shared channel mentioned above.
  • the second physical shared channel in the tenth part may be the same as or not completely the same as the fourth physical shared channel mentioned above.
  • the network device does not need to indicate the MCS of the N physical shared channels separately, and the terminal device can use the MCS adopted by the transmission unit carried by the N physical shared channels for the last transmission Shared channel for demodulation. If the terminal device misses any piece of control information in the previous transmission of the N physical shared channels, the network device may also determine the MCS adopted by the corresponding physical shared channels.
  • the first field may be Carrying the NDI of at least one second physical shared channel in the K second physical shared channels and/or the offset of the MCS index of the N physical shared channels.
  • the control information is DCI
  • the first field is the MCS field
  • the MCS field includes 5 bits
  • M first physical shared channels include PDSCH0
  • K second physical shared channels include PDSCH1 as an example
  • the MCS field may specifically be any one of the following (a) to (d).
  • the DCI includes a HARQ field
  • the HARQ field is used to indicate the HARQ process number of PDSCH0.
  • 1 bit in the MCS field is used to indicate the NDI of PDSCH1
  • 2 bits in the MCS field are used for the offset of the HARQ process number of PDSCH1 relative to the HARQ process number of PDSCH0 (an example of the second indication information )
  • the 2 bits in the MCS field are used to indicate the offset between the MCS index of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH1 and the MCS index of the previous transmission of the transmission unit and/or the difference between the MCS index of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH0 and the previous The offset between the MCS indices of this transport unit at a time.
  • the 2 bits in the MCS field can directly indicate the difference between the MCS index of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH1 and the MCS index of the transmission unit last transmitted. or the offset between the MCS index of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH0 and the MCS index of the last transmission of the transmission unit.
  • the 2 bits in the MCS field can indicate the difference between the MCS index of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH0 and the MCS index of the last transmission of the transmission unit or the offset between the MCS index of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH1 and the MCS index of the transmission unit last transmitted by PDSCH0.
  • 2 bits in the MCS field are used to indicate the offset of the HARQ process number of PDSCH1 relative to the HARQ process number of PDSCH0 (an example of the second indication information), and 3 bits in the MCS field are used to indicate PDSCH1
  • 3 bits in the MCS field are used for the offset of the HARQ process number of PDSCH1 relative to the HARQ process number of PDSCH0 (an example of the second indication information), and 2 bits in the MCS field are used to indicate the HARQ process number of PDSCH1
  • the first field may also carry at least CBGFI of a second physical shared channel.
  • the first field may carry the NDI of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels, the offset of the MCS index of the N physical shared channels, and the K second physical shared channel One or more of the CBGFIs of the at least one second physical shared channel.
  • the MCS field including 5 bits, the M first physical shared channels including PDSCH0, and the K second physical shared channels including PDSCH1 as an example, the MCS field will be introduced as an example.
  • the MCS field may specifically be any one of the following (e) to (g).
  • 1 bit in the MCS field is used to indicate the NDI of PDSCH1
  • 1 bit in the MCS field is used to indicate the CBGFI of PDSCH1
  • 3 bits in the MCS field are used to indicate that the HARQ process number of PDSCH1 is relative to the HARQ process of PDSCH0
  • the offset of the number (an example of the second indication information).
  • 1 bit in the MCS field is used to indicate the NDI of PDSCH1
  • 1 bit in the MCS field is used to indicate the offset between the MCS index of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH1 and the MCS index of the last transmission of the transmission unit
  • the 3 bits in the MCS field are used to indicate the offset of the HARQ process number of PDSCH1 relative to one HARQ process number in the first HARQ process number (a kind of second indication information).
  • the CBGFIs of the N physical shared channels may be the same.
  • the control information may indicate the CBGFI of one physical shared channel.
  • the M first physical shared channels include PDSCH0
  • the K second physical shared channels include PDSCH1
  • the first field is the MCS field as an example.
  • the MCS field may not need to indicate the CBGFI of PDSCH1
  • the CBGFI field in the DCI may indicate the CBGFI of PDSCH0.
  • the terminal device can determine the CBGFI of PDSCH0 and PDSCH1 according to the CBGFI field in the DCI.
  • the control information further includes third indication information.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate the RV of the N physical shared channels, and the third indication information includes N bits, and the N bits are respectively used to indicate the RVs of the N physical shared channels, that is, each bit in the N bits It is used to indicate the RV of one physical shared channel among the N physical shared channels. In this way, the RV of each physical shared channel can be flexibly indicated.
  • the terminal device and the network device may be pre-configured with the value of the third indication information and the RV of the N physical shared channels.
  • the network device may determine the value of the third indication information according to the second correspondence.
  • the terminal device may determine the respective RVs of the N physical shared channels according to the third indication information in the control information and the second corresponding relationship.
  • RVs of a physical shared channel corresponding to 1 bit in the third indication information is shown in Table 4 below.
  • the value of N is 2. If the network device determines that the RV of one physical shared channel is 2 and the RV of another physical shared channel is 0, then the network device can determine that the value of the third indication information can be based on Table 4 above. to "10". After receiving the third indication information, the terminal device can determine that the RV of one of the two physical shared channels is 2 and that the RV of the other physical shared channel is 0 according to the third indication information and the contents of Table 4 above.
  • N bits of the third indication information may be used to indicate any one of the N physical shared channels, such that When N is equal to 2 or greater than 2, N bits may indicate more redundancy versions.
  • the control information may also include CBGTI.
  • the CBGTI is used to indicate the CBGs for N physical shared channel retransmissions.
  • the CBGTI may be carried by the fourth field in the control information.
  • the fourth field and the first field above may be the same field or different fields, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the fourth field is, for example, the CBGTI field.
  • End devices may be pre-configured to support CBG-based transport.
  • the network device sends sixth configuration information to the terminal device.
  • the sixth configuration information includes fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to enable CBG-based transmission.
  • the sixth configuration information is carried in code block group transmission (codeblock group transmission) signaling of the RRC message.
  • the control information also includes the CBGTI field accordingly.
  • the control information Taking the control information as DCI1_1 as an example, if the terminal device is enabled for CBG-based transmission, the DCI1_1 also includes the CBGTI field.
  • the network device may also configure the maximum number of code block groups included in each transport block (maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock) for the terminal device through the seventh configuration information.
  • the seventh configuration information is carried in the codeblockgrouptransmission signaling of the RRC message, and the network device can configure the maximum number of CBGs for each TB for the terminal device through the maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock parameter in the codeblockgrouptransmission signaling.
  • control information may also include the first row index.
  • the first row index belongs to at least one row index in the time domain resource allocation list.
  • the index in the first row is used to indicate the number of physical shared channels indicated in the time domain resource allocation list.
  • the meaning of the time domain resource allocation list can be referred to above.
  • the first row index is 4 in the above table 1, and the fourth row in the above table 1 corresponds to indicating the time domain resource information of the two physical shared channels, which is equivalent to indicating that the first row index indicates the two physical shared channels .
  • the first row index is carried by the fifth field in the control information.
  • the fifth field and the first field may be the same field or different fields, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the fifth field is, for example, a time domain resource assignment (time domain resource assignment, TDRA) field.
  • control information further includes sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate frequency domain resource information of the N physical shared channels.
  • the sixth indication information may be carried by a frequency domain resource assignment (frequency domain resource assignment, FDRA) field in the control information.
  • the resource information in the frequency domain is, for example, the number of resource blocks (resource block, RB).
  • the frequency domain resource information of the N physical shared channels is the same, or the frequency domain resource information of any two physical shared channels is different, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • control information may schedule N physical shared channels in one time slot, or may schedule N physical shared channels in different time slots, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. If the control information schedules N physical shared channels in different time slots, then the above time domain resource allocation list may further include the respective corresponding time slots in at least one physical shared channel.
  • the terminal device After receiving the control information, the terminal device also determines the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels. Since the first field has a different size relationship between N and M, the indication information carried by the control information is different, and naturally the information obtained by the terminal device by parsing the control information is also different. Therefore, before parsing the control information, the terminal device may first determine the magnitude relationship between N and M. As discussed above, the value of M is preset. Therefore, the terminal device can determine the size relationship between N and M only by determining the value of N. The following describes how the terminal device determines the value of N.
  • the control information includes the CBGTI.
  • the terminal device determines the value of N according to the CBGTI and the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels.
  • the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels of control information is determined, the maximum number of physical shared channels that can be indicated by CBGTI is also determined. For example, the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels is L, then CBGTI The maximum number of physical shared channels that can be indicated is L.
  • the terminal device can determine how many bits each physical shared channel occupies in the CBGTI according to the number of bits of the CBGTI and the maximum number of physical shared channels that can be indicated by the control information, and then according to each physical shared channel corresponding to each physical shared channel in the CBGTI The value of the bit determines the value of N.
  • the CBGTI includes 8 bits, and the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels is 2, which means that the first 4 bits in the CBGTI indicate one PDSCH, and the last 4 bits in the CBGTI indicate another PDSCH.
  • the terminal device determines that the last 4 bits in the CBGTI are all 0, that is, "0000", it means that the CBGTI only schedules one PDSCH this time, and accordingly, determine that the value of N is 1.
  • the first manner above is applicable to the case where the communication system supports a CBG-based transmission scheme. Moreover, in the first manner, the network device does not need to separately indicate the value of N to the terminal device, which can relatively reduce the interaction between the network device and the terminal device.
  • the control information includes the index of the first row.
  • the terminal device determines the number of physical shared channels indicated by the index in the first row from the time domain resource allocation list, and determines the value of N.
  • the terminal device can determine the index in the first row, and the corresponding physical shared channel time domain resources in the time domain resource allocation list can also determine the number of physical shared channels scheduled this time, so as to determine the selection of N value.
  • the first row index in the control information is 1, and the terminal device determines that the first row index corresponds to the time domain resource allocation list according to the first row index. 2 physical shared channels, so it can be determined that the value of N is 2.
  • the terminal device may also determine the time domain resource information of each of the N physical shared channels from the time domain resource allocation list according to the first row index.
  • the first row index is 4 in Table 2, and when the DMRS-type (type) A-position is 2, and the PDSCH mapping type is type A, the terminal device allocates resources from the time domain resource allocation list according to the first row index
  • the time-domain resource information of two physical shared channels is determined in .
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of time-frequency resource configuration of the two physical shared channels provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the abscissa in Figure 7 represents a symbol on a slot (symbol in a slot), the ordinate represents a sub-carrier (sub-carrier), and the DMRS is located on symbol 2 of the slot.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of time-frequency resource configuration of the two physical shared channels provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the abscissa in Figure 7 represents a symbol on a slot (symbol in a slot), the ordinate represents a sub-carrier (sub-carrier), and the DMRS is located on symbol 2 of the slot
  • the frequency domain resources of PDSCH0 and PDSCH1 are the same as an example.
  • the number of RBs on the symbol occupied by PDSCH0 is the same as the number of RBs on the symbol occupied by PDSCH1 .
  • each physical shared channel occupies 3 RBs (each RB is composed of 12 resource elements (resource element, RE), that is, each symbol in Figure 7 contains 36 REs.
  • PDSCH0 is used to carry TB1
  • PDSCH1 is used to bear TB2.
  • the start symbol of PDSCH0 is 2, and the number of symbols occupied is 7, and the start symbol of PDSCH1 is 9, and the number of symbols occupied is 5.
  • the second manner above is applicable to the case where the communication system adopts a CBG-based transmission scheme, and is also applicable to the case where the communication system adopts a non-CBG-based transmission scheme.
  • the control information includes the index of the first row and the CBGTI.
  • the terminal device can determine the value of N according to the CBGTI.
  • control information includes the first row index and the CBGTI
  • the terminal device can determine the value of N according to the CBGTI, and the manner of determining the value of N according to the CBGTI can refer to the foregoing.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device determines the size relationship between N and M, it can correspondingly determine the HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels from the control information. If the contents of the control information are different, the manners for the terminal equipment to determine the respective HARQ processes of the N physical shared channels are also different, which will be introduced respectively below.
  • N is equal to M.
  • the terminal device may directly determine the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel according to the first HARQ process number.
  • the terminal device can obtain the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels by analyzing the first HARQ process number.
  • the terminal device can analyze the first HARQ process number, and can obtain the HARQ process numbers of the first part of the N physical shared channels.
  • the terminal device may determine the HARQ process numbers of the second part of the physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels according to the first rule and the HARQ process numbers of the first part of the physical shared channels.
  • the terminal device may determine the respective RVs of the N physical shared channels according to the third indication information.
  • the terminal device may determine the respective MCSs of the N physical shared channels according to the first indication information in the control information.
  • the first HARQ process information indicated by the second indication information is the second HARQ process number.
  • the terminal device may determine the HARQ process number of the second physical shared channel according to the first indication information.
  • the terminal device can determine the respective HARQ processes of the K second physical shared channels according to the second indication information Number.
  • the terminal device can determine the third part of the second physical shared channel according to the second indication information.
  • HARQ process ID of the physical shared channel The terminal device may determine the HARQ process numbers of the fourth part of the second physical shared channels according to the second rule and the HARQ process numbers of the third part of the second physical shared channels.
  • the first HARQ process information indicated by the second indication information is an offset of the second HARQ process number.
  • the terminal device may determine the respective HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels according to the first HARQ process numbers, and the determination method may refer to the foregoing. And according to the offset of the second HARQ process number and the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel in the M first physical shared channels, determine the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels.
  • the offset of the second HARQ process number includes the HARQ process number of the fifth part of the second physical shared channel in the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process number Offset.
  • the terminal device may determine the respective HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels according to the first HARQ process numbers, and the determination method may refer to the foregoing. And according to the offset of the second HARQ process number, and the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel in the M first physical shared channels, determine the fifth part of the second physical channel in the K second physical shared channels The HARQ process ID of the shared channel.
  • the terminal device may determine the sixth part of the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels according to the third rule and the HARQ process number of the fifth part of the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels.
  • the HARQ process ID of the channel For meanings of the fifth part of the second physical shared channel and the sixth part of the second physical shared channel, reference may be made to the foregoing.
  • the terminal device may determine the respective HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels according to the first HARQ process numbers, and the determination method may refer to the foregoing.
  • the terminal device determines the respective HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels according to the respective HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels and the offset of the HARQ process numbers.
  • the terminal device may determine the respective HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels according to the first HARQ process number.
  • the terminal device can determine the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel, and according to the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel , and the offset of the HARQ process number, so as to determine the respective HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels.
  • the terminal device may determine the K second physical shared channels according to the first field The corresponding NDI.
  • the first field also carries the offsets of the MCS indexes of the N physical shared channels, then the terminal device can determine the MCS corresponding to the N physical shared channels according to the offsets of the MCS indexes of the N physical shared channels .
  • the first field also carries the CBGFI of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels, then the terminal device may The CBGFI of each of the N physical shared channels is determined.
  • the network device may execute S601 and S602 first, and then execute S603, or the network device may execute S601, S602, and S603 at the same time, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the network device sends the transmission units respectively carried by the N physical shared channels to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the transmission units corresponding to each of the N physical shared channels through the HARQ process corresponding to each of the N physical shared channels.
  • the network device may send the transmission units respectively carried by the N physical shared channels to the terminal device.
  • the transmission units carried by each of the N physical shared channels may not be completely the same, or may be the same.
  • the time for the network device to send the transmission units carried by each of the N physical shared channels to the terminal device may not be exactly the same, or may be the same, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device may receive third configuration information from the network device, where the third configuration information is used to configure the first DMRS.
  • the third configuration information is, for example, carried in an RRC message.
  • the DMRSs of the N physical shared channels are all the same, and only one first DMRS may be configured in the third configuration information.
  • the terminal device may respectively perform channel estimation on the N physical shared channels according to the first DMRS. In this case, only one DMRS may be configured in the third configuration information, thereby reducing the number of bits occupied by the third configuration information.
  • the terminal device may receive transmission units corresponding to each of the N physical shared channels through HARQ processes corresponding to each of the N physical shared channels. For example, the terminal device may receive transmission units corresponding to each of the N physical shared channels according to respective time domain resource information and frequency domain resource information of the N physical shared channels.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device receives the respective transmission units of the N physical shared channels, the terminal device decodes each physical shared channel in the N physical shared channels, and specifically decodes the transmission unit on each physical shared channel, and so on. After the N physical shared channels are decoded, the decoding results of the N physical shared channels can also be obtained.
  • the terminal device determines the first HARQ response information corresponding to each physical shared channel in the N physical shared channels according to the respective decoding results of the N physical shared channels, and performs spatial binding on the N first HARQ response information, thereby obtaining the first HARQ response information.
  • Two HARQ response information is to perform a logical AND operation on the bits at the same position among the P bits in the N pieces of first HARQ response information.
  • the process of determining the first HARQ response information will be introduced below.
  • the terminal device determines that the decoding result of a transmission unit in the physical shared channel is successful, it determines to perform an acknowledgment ACK on the transmission unit. If the terminal device determines that the decoding result of the transmission unit is a decoding failure, it determines to perform a negative acknowledgment NACK on the transmission unit.
  • the terminal device can obtain a combination of HARQ responses of at least one transmission unit on the physical shared channel, and thus obtain the first HARQ response information.
  • a physical shared channel transmits P transmission units.
  • the first HARQ response information includes P bits, that is, one bit in the P bits corresponds to a transmission unit on the physical shared channel, and each bit in the P bits is used for Indicates ACK or NACK of a transmission unit on the physical shared channel, and P is a positive integer.
  • the terminal device can obtain the respective first HARQ response information of the N physical shared channels, and thus obtain the N first HARQ response information.
  • the terminal device may generate an ACK or NACK for a TB, and obtain the first HARQ response information of the TB.
  • the first HARQ response information includes P bits, where the value of P is 1, and the 1 bit is used to indicate the ACK or NACK of the decoding result of the TB.
  • the terminal device can generate 4 ACKs or NACKs for the 4 CBGs respectively, and obtain the first HARQ of the PDSCH Answer message.
  • the first HARQ response information includes P bits, where the value of P is 4, and the 4 bits are used to indicate ACK or NACK of the 4 CBG decoding results.
  • the terminal device receives CBG0, CBG1, CBG2 and CBG3 on PDSCH0 at D03, and receives CBG0, CBG1, CBG2 and CBG3 on PDSCH1.
  • the terminal device determines that CBG0 on PDSCH0 and PDSCH1 are successfully decoded, and then generates ACK (indicated by A in FIG. 8 ) for CBG0 on PDSCH0 and PDSCH1, and the ACK is represented by "1" in the first HARQ response information.
  • the terminal device determines that CBG1 on PDSCH0 and PDSCH1 are decoded successfully, and then generates ACK for CBG1 on PDSCH0 and PDSCH1. If the terminal device determines that the decoding of CBG2 on PDSCH0 fails, it generates a NACK for CBG2 on PDSCH0 (indicated by N in FIG.
  • NACK is represented by "0" in the first HARQ response information.
  • the terminal device determines that CBG3 on PDSCH0 and PDSCH1 are decoded successfully, and then generates ACK for CBG3 on PDSCH0 and PDSCH1.
  • the terminal device determines that the first HARQ response information for PDSCH0 may be expressed as "1101”, and the first HARQ response information for determining PDSCH1 may be expressed as "1111".
  • the terminal device may directly feed back the first HARQ response information corresponding to a physical shared channel to the network device.
  • the value of N is greater than 1, it may cause more first HARQ response information to be fed back by the terminal equipment, and since the value of the number N of physical shared channels scheduled by the control information each time is uncertain, this also As a result, the number of bits occupied by the first HARQ response information that the terminal equipment needs to feed back each time is uncertain.
  • the terminal device since the network device cannot determine the number of bits of the first HARQ response information that the terminal device needs to feed back each time, it is not conducive for the network device to receive the first HARQ response information. For this reason, in this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may perform spatial bundling on N pieces of first HARQ response information to obtain second HARQ response information including P bits.
  • each first HARQ response information in the N pieces of first HARQ response information includes P bits, and one bit corresponds to one transmission unit in one physical shared channel.
  • the terminal device performs a logical AND operation on the N i-th bits of the N first HARQ response information, where i takes a value from 1 to P, so as to obtain the second HARQ response information.
  • the N first HARQ response information includes two first HARQ response information as shown in FIG. 8 as an example.
  • the terminal device performs a logical AND operation on the first bit (value 1) in the first HARQ response information of PDSCH0 and the first bit (value 1) in the first HARQ response information of PDSCH1 to obtain 1; the terminal device Perform a logical AND operation on the second bit (value 1) in the first HARQ response information of PDSCH0 and the second bit (value 1) in the first HARQ response information of PDSCH1 to obtain 1; the terminal device can The third bit in the first HARQ response information of PDSCH0 (the value is 0) and the third bit in the first HARQ response information of PDSCH1 (the value is 1) are logically ANDed to obtain 0; the terminal device can PDSCH0
  • the fourth bit (value 1) in the first HARQ response information of PDSCH1 is logically ANDed with the fourth bit (value 1) in the first HARQ response information of PD
  • the terminal device combines the results of all logical AND operations to obtain the second HARQ response information, which may be specifically represented as 1101 . Therefore, after receiving the second HARQ response information, the network device will perform retransmission scheduling for both CBG2 of PDSCH0 and PDSCH1, although the decoding of CBG2 of PDSCH1 is correct.
  • the terminal device can spatially bind the N first HARQ response information, so that even if the value of N is uncertain, the terminal device can feed back the second HARQ response information including P bits to the network device, The number of bits occupied by the second HARQ response information fed back by the terminal equipment is determined. Moreover, when the control information schedules multiple physical shared channels, the number of bits of the HARQ response information reported by the terminal equipment can be relatively reduced.
  • the terminal device may stipulated in a protocol that the terminal device needs to spatially bind the N first HARQ response information.
  • the terminal device may determine whether to perform spatial bundling on the N pieces of first HARQ response information according to the fourth indication information.
  • the network device sends fourth configuration information to the terminal device, where the fourth configuration information may be a PDSCH-config information element in the RRC message.
  • the fourth configuration information includes the fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate whether to spatially bundle the N pieces of first HARQ response information scheduled by the control information.
  • the terminal device determines that the above process can be used to spatially bundle the N pieces of first HARQ response information, so as to obtain the second HARQ response information.
  • the terminal device feeds back the second HARQ response information to the network device as an example, but when the value of N is 1, or the terminal device is instructed not to perform spatial binding, the terminal The device may directly feed back N pieces of first HARQ response information to the network device.
  • the terminal device sends the second HARQ response information to the network device.
  • the network device receives the second HARQ response information from the terminal device.
  • the network device may determine whether the respective transmission units of the N physical shared channels are successfully transmitted according to the content of the second HARQ response information. If it is determined that the transmission unit of a physical shared channel has not been successfully transmitted, the network device may continue to retransmit the transmission unit of the physical shared channel.
  • the network device receives the second HARQ response information is 1101, and the value of N is 2, then the network device determines that the CBG2 in PDSCH0 and PDSCH1 has not been successfully transmitted, then the network device can send a message to the terminal The device retransmits the CBG2.
  • the first configuration information, the second configuration information, the third configuration information and the fourth configuration information, the fifth configuration information, the sixth configuration information and the seventh configuration information in the embodiment of the present application can all be sent in one message
  • the first configuration information, the second configuration information, the third configuration information, the fourth configuration information, the fifth configuration information, the sixth configuration information, and the seventh configuration information are all sent to the terminal device through different messages. There is no limit to this.
  • the first field, the second field, the third field, the fourth field, and the fifth field in this embodiment of the present application may all be the same field.
  • the first field, the second field, the third field, the fourth field, and the fifth field are all different fields, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • S601-S602 and S604-S607 in FIG. 6 are all optional steps. These optional steps are illustrated in dashed lines in FIG. 6 .
  • the network device can schedule transmission of multiple physical shared channels through one piece of control information, so as to reduce signaling overhead.
  • the first field carries different indication information, which reduces the number of bits occupied by the control information.
  • FIG. 6 is illustrated by taking the communication method applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 4 as an example, and the communication method may also be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the control information is, for example, SCI
  • the N physical shared channels scheduled by the control information may all be PSSCHs.
  • the network device in FIG. 6 can be replaced by the first terminal device, and the terminal device in FIG. 6 can be replaced by the second terminal device.
  • the interaction process between the first terminal device and the second terminal device can refer to FIG. 6 , They are not listed here.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 900 .
  • the communication device 900 can be applied to a terminal device, or a device in the terminal device, which can realize the functions of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of this application; the communication device 900 can also be able to support the terminal device to realize the The means of the function of the terminal equipment in the method.
  • the communication device 900 may be a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module.
  • the communication device 900 may be implemented by a system on a chip. In the embodiment of the present application, the system-on-a-chip may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the communication device 900 may include a transceiver module 901 .
  • the transceiver module 901 may be configured to execute the step of receiving control information from a network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 . It may also perform receiving the first configuration information from the network device, receiving the second configuration information from the network device, sending the second HARQ response information to the network device, and other processes supporting the technology described herein, etc.
  • the transceiver module 901 is used for the communication device 900 to communicate with other modules, and it may be a circuit, device, interface, bus, software module, transceiver or any other device capable of realizing communication.
  • the communication device 900 further includes a processing module 902 .
  • the processing module 902 is indicated by a dotted line box, which is optional.
  • processing module 902 may be used to execute steps such as S605 and S606 above, and may also be used to support other processes of the technologies described herein.
  • each functional module in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into a processing In the controller, it can also be physically present separately, or two or more modules can be integrated into one module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software function modules.
  • FIG. 10 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1000 .
  • the communication device 1000 can be applied to a network device, or a device in the network device, which can realize the function of the network device in the method provided by the embodiment of this application; the communication device 1000 can also be able to support the network device to implement the A means of functioning in a network device.
  • the communication device 1000 can be applied to a terminal device, or it can be a device in the terminal device, which can realize the functions of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application; the communication device 1000 can also be able to support the terminal device to implement the method provided in the embodiment of the present application A device that functions as a terminal device.
  • the communication device 1000 may be a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module.
  • the communication device 1000 may be implemented by a system on a chip.
  • the system-on-a-chip may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the communication device 1000 may include a transceiver module 1001 .
  • the transceiver module 1001 may be configured to execute the step of sending control information to the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 . It is also possible to perform sending the first configuration information to the terminal device, sending the second configuration information to the terminal device, sending the transmission units respectively carried by N physical shared channels to the terminal device, and receiving the second HARQ response information from the terminal device, etc.
  • the transceiver module 1001 may also be used to support other processes of the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module 1001 is used for the communication device 1000 to communicate with other modules, and it may be a circuit, device, interface, bus, software module, transceiver or any other device capable of realizing communication.
  • the communication device 1000 further includes a processing module 1002 .
  • the processing module 1002 is indicated by a dashed box, which is optional.
  • the processing module 1002 may be used to control the transceiver module 1001 to execute corresponding steps, may also be used to determine control information, and may also be used to support other processes of the technologies described herein.
  • each functional module in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into a processing In the controller, it can also be physically present separately, or two or more modules can be integrated into one module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software function modules.
  • FIG. 11 shows a communication device 1100 provided in this embodiment of the present application, where the communication device 1100 may be the terminal device shown in FIG. 4 , or the communication device 1100 may be the first terminal device shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the communication device 1100 may be a system on a chip.
  • the system-on-a-chip may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the communication apparatus 1100 includes at least one processor 1101 for realizing or supporting the communication apparatus 1100 to implement the terminal device shown in FIG. 4 of this application, or the communication apparatus 1100 may be the function of the first terminal device shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the processor 1101 may receive the control information, for details, refer to the detailed description in the method example, and details are not repeated here.
  • the communication device 1100 may further include a communication interface 1102 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the communication device 1100 communicates with other devices.
  • the other device may be a server.
  • the processor 1101 can use the communication interface 1102 to send and receive data.
  • the communication device 1100 may also include at least one memory 1103 for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • the memory 1103 is coupled to the processor 1101 .
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or a communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
  • the processor 1101 may cooperate with the memory 1103 .
  • Processor 1101 may execute program instructions stored in memory 1103 .
  • At least one of the at least one memory 1103 may be included in the processor 1101 .
  • any communication method in the embodiments shown in FIG. 6 may be implemented.
  • the communication device in FIG. 11 can also implement the functions of the communication device in FIG. 9 .
  • the memory 1103 in FIG. 11 is an optional part.
  • the memory 1103 is coupled with the processor 1101 .
  • a specific connection medium among the communication interface 1102, the processor 1101, and the memory 1103 is not limited.
  • the communication interface 1102, the processor 1101, and the memory 1103 are connected through the bus 1104.
  • the bus is represented by a thick line in FIG. 11, and the connection mode between other components is only for schematic illustration , is not limited.
  • the bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus and so on. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 11 , but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the processor 1101 may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component, and may implement Or execute the methods, steps and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application.
  • a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the methods disclosed in connection with the embodiments of the present application may be implemented by a hardware processor, or by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the memory 1103 can be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk (hard disk drive, HDD) or a solid-state drive (solid-state drive, SSD), etc., and can also be a volatile memory (volatile memory), For example random-access memory (random-access memory, RAM).
  • a memory is, but is not limited to, any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer.
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of implementing a storage function, and is used for storing program instructions and/or data.
  • FIG. 12 shows a communication device 1200 provided in this embodiment of the present application, where the communication device 1200 may be the network device shown in FIG. 4 , or the communication device 1100 may be the second terminal device shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the communication device 1200 may be a system on a chip.
  • the system-on-a-chip may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the communication device 1200 includes at least one processor 1201, a communication interface 1202, and at least one memory 1203.
  • the processor 1201 executes the program instructions in the memory 1203, any communication method in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 can be implemented.
  • the communication interface 1202 , the processor 1201 and the memory 1203 are connected through a bus 1204 , and the bus is represented by a thick line in FIG. 12 .
  • the communication device in FIG. 12 can also implement the functions of the communication device in FIG. 10 .
  • the memory 1203 in FIG. 2 is an optional part.
  • the memory 1203 is coupled with the processor 1201.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which is used to store a computer program.
  • the computer program When the computer program is run on a computer, the computer can execute any of the embodiments shown in FIG. 6 .
  • a method of communication A method of communication.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product stores a computer program, the computer program includes program instructions, and when the program instructions are executed by a computer, the computer executes any of the embodiments shown in FIG. 6 .
  • a method of communication is also provided.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, the chip system includes a processor, and may also include a memory, which is used to implement any communication method in the embodiment shown in Figure 6, and can also be used to implement the network device or The function of the terminal device, or used to realize the function of the aforementioned first terminal device or the second terminal device.
  • the system-on-a-chip may consist of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, network equipment, user equipment or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. integrated with one or more available media.
  • the available medium can be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), optical media (for example, digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD for short)), or semiconductor media (for example, SSD).

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Detection And Prevention Of Errors In Transmission (AREA)

Abstract

The present application relates to the technical field of communications, and provides a communication method and apparatus, used for reducing signaling overhead. In the communication method, one piece of control information can be used for scheduling N physical shared channels, the N physical shared channels comprising M first physical shared channels; in the case that N is equal to M, a first field in the control information can carry first indication information, the first indication information being used for indicating an MCS of the N physical shared channels; and in the case that N is greater than M, the first field can carry second indication information, the second indication information being used for indicating HARQ process information of K second physical shared channels other than the M first physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels. The present application provides a mechanism of supporting control information to schedule a plurality of physical shared channels, so as to reduce signaling overhead.

Description

一种通信方法及装置A communication method and device
相关申请的交叉引用Cross References to Related Applications
本申请要求在2021年08月26日提交中国专利局、申请号为202110987590.1、申请名称为“一种XR业务的重传方法”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中;本申请要求在2021年11月04日提交中国专利局、申请号为202111298540.9、申请名称为“一种通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application submitted to the China Patent Office on August 26, 2021, with the application number 202110987590.1 and the application name "A Retransmission Method for XR Services", the entire content of which is incorporated in this application by reference middle; this application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application with application number 202111298540.9 and application title "A Communication Method and Device" filed with the China Patent Office on November 04, 2021, the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference in this application middle.
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及装置。The present application relates to the technical field of communication, and in particular to a communication method and device.
背景技术Background technique
在通信过程中,可能会出现数据传输出错甚至丢包的情况,为了提高数据传输的可靠性,引入了混合自动重传请求(hybrid automatic repeat request,HARQ)机制。在HARQ机制下,发送端可在待发送的原始数据中添加具有一定检错和纠错能力的冗余数据,并向接收端发送原始数据和对应的冗余数据。接收端接收原始数据和对应的冗余数据之后,可根据冗余数据对原始数据进行解码,并根据原始数据的解码结果,向发送端反馈HARQ应答信息。其中,如果接收端对原始数据解码正确,则该HARQ应答信息为确认应答(acknowledgement,ACK),而如果接收端对原始数据解码错误,则该HARQ应答信息为否定应答(negative-acknowledgement,NACK)。如果发送端接收到ACK,则发送端可继续发送下一个数据,或者可确定原始数据发送过程结束。而如果发送端接收到NACK,则发送端可向接收端重传原始数据。In the communication process, data transmission errors or even packet loss may occur. In order to improve the reliability of data transmission, a hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) mechanism is introduced. Under the HARQ mechanism, the sending end can add redundant data with certain error detection and error correction capabilities to the original data to be sent, and send the original data and corresponding redundant data to the receiving end. After receiving the original data and the corresponding redundant data, the receiving end may decode the original data according to the redundant data, and feed back HARQ response information to the sending end according to the decoding result of the original data. Wherein, if the receiving end decodes the original data correctly, the HARQ response information is an acknowledgment (acknowledgment, ACK), and if the receiving end decodes the original data incorrectly, the HARQ response information is a negative-acknowledgment (NACK). . If the sending end receives the ACK, the sending end may continue to send the next data, or may determine that the original data sending process ends. And if the sender receives NACK, the sender can retransmit the original data to the receiver.
接收端是通过HARQ进程接收来自发送端的数据,以及生成相应的HARQ应答信息等。接收端可维持多个HARQ进程,不同的HARQ进程用于接收不同的信道上的数据。而接收端具体通过哪个HARQ进程接收,需要发送端进行指示。例如在下行传输场景中,作为发送端的基站可以向作为接收端的终端设备发送下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI),其中一个DCI可携带一个物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)对应的HARQ进程号。终端设备根据DCI携带的HARQ进程号,在该HARQ进程号对应的HARQ进程接收该PDSCH。按照目前的方式,发送端如需指示多个信道的HARQ进程号,则需要发送多个控制信息,信令开销较大。The receiving end receives data from the sending end through the HARQ process, and generates corresponding HARQ response information and the like. The receiving end can maintain multiple HARQ processes, and different HARQ processes are used to receive data on different channels. The receiving end needs to indicate which HARQ process is used to receive the receiving end. For example, in a downlink transmission scenario, the base station as the sending end can send downlink control information (DCI) to the terminal device as the receiving end, where one DCI can carry a physical downlink shared channel (physical downlink shared channel, PDSCH) corresponding HARQ process ID. The terminal device receives the PDSCH in the HARQ process corresponding to the HARQ process number according to the HARQ process number carried by the DCI. According to the current method, if the sending end needs to indicate the HARQ process numbers of multiple channels, it needs to send multiple control information, and the signaling overhead is relatively large.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法及装置,用于减少通信过程中的信令开销。Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device, which are used to reduce signaling overhead in a communication process.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由终端设备、或者终端设备上芯片、或者终端设备上的芯片组等执行。为便于描述,下文中以终端设备执行为例。该方法包括:接收控制信息,所述控制信息用于调度N个物理共享信道,所述控制信息包括第一字段,所述N个物理共享信道包括M个第一物理共享信道,所述N和所述M均为 正整数;其中,在所述N等于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段承载第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述N个物理共享信道的调制与编码策略(modulation and coding scheme,MCS);在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段承载第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示K个第二物理共享信道的第一混合自动重传请求HARQ进程信息,所述K为正整数,所述K个第二物理共享信道为所述N个物理共享信道中除了所述M个第一物理共享信道之外的物理共享信道。In a first aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, and the method may be executed by a terminal device, or a chip on the terminal device, or a chipset on the terminal device, or the like. For ease of description, the execution of the terminal device is used as an example in the following. The method includes: receiving control information, the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels, the control information includes a first field, the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels, and the N and The Ms are all positive integers; where, when the N is equal to the M, the first field carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the N physical shared channels A modulation and coding scheme (modulation and coding scheme, MCS); when the N is greater than the M, the first field carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate K second physical The first hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ process information of the shared channel, the K is a positive integer, and the K second physical shared channels are among the N physical shared channels except the M first physical shared channels external physical shared channel.
本申请实施例中,一个控制信息可调度多个物理共享信道,无需通过多个控制信息来调度多个物理共享信道,减少了用于传输控制信息的开销。且该控制信息可在一个时隙内调度多个物理共享信道,从而可相对减少调度多个物理共享信道的时延。而终端设备也无需接收多个控制信息,有利于减小终端设备由于接收信息而带来的功耗。并且,在N等于M的情况下,第一字段可用于承载第一指示信息,在N大于M的情况下,该第一字段可用于承载第二指示信息,如此实现了对第一字段的复用,可相对减少控制信息占用的比特数。In the embodiment of the present application, one piece of control information can schedule multiple physical shared channels, and there is no need to use multiple pieces of control information to schedule multiple physical shared channels, reducing the overhead for transmitting control information. Moreover, the control information can schedule multiple physical shared channels in one time slot, thereby relatively reducing the time delay for scheduling multiple physical shared channels. The terminal device does not need to receive multiple pieces of control information, which is beneficial to reduce the power consumption of the terminal device caused by receiving information. Moreover, when N is equal to M, the first field can be used to carry the first indication information, and when N is greater than M, the first field can be used to carry the second indication information, thus realizing the multiplexing of the first field. It can relatively reduce the number of bits occupied by the control information.
在一种可能的实施方式中,所述控制信息还包括码块组传输信息(code block group transmission information,CBGTI),所述CBGTI用于指示所述N个物理共享信道重传的码组块CBG;所述方法还包括:接收第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置所述控制信息最大可调度的物理共享信道的个数;根据所述CBGTI,确定所述N的取值。In a possible implementation manner, the control information further includes code block group transmission information (code block group transmission information, CBGTI), and the CBGTI is used to indicate the code block CBG for retransmission of the N physical shared channels The method further includes: receiving first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels in the control information; and determining the value of N according to the CBGTI.
上述实施方式中,终端设备可根据控制信息中的CBGTI,确定该控制信息调度的物理共享信道的个数N,无需经过复杂计算,确定方式简单。并且,也无需单独利用控制信息以指示N的取值,这样也就无需额外增加控制信息所占用的比特数。In the above embodiment, the terminal device can determine the number N of physical shared channels scheduled by the control information according to the CBGTI in the control information, without complicated calculation, and the determination method is simple. Moreover, there is no need to use the control information alone to indicate the value of N, so there is no need to additionally increase the number of bits occupied by the control information.
在一种可能的实施方式中,所述控制信息还包括第一行索引,所述方法还包括:接收第二配置信息,其中,所述第二配置信息用于配置时域资源分配列表,所述时域资源分配列表包括至少一个行索引,以及包括所述至少一个行索引中每个行索引指示的至少一个物理共享信道各自的时域资源信息,所述至少一个行索引包括所述第一行索引;从所述时域资源分配列表中确定所述第一行索引所指示的物理共享信道的个数,确定所述N的取值。In a possible implementation manner, the control information further includes a first row index, and the method further includes: receiving second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used to configure a time-domain resource allocation list, and the The time domain resource allocation list includes at least one row index, and time domain resource information of at least one physical shared channel indicated by each row index in the at least one row index, and the at least one row index includes the first row index: determine the number of physical shared channels indicated by the first row index from the time domain resource allocation list, and determine the value of N.
上述实施方式中,终端设备可根据控制信息中的第一行索引,确定该第一行索引所关联的物理共享信道的个数,以获得N的取值,无需终端设备进行复杂的计算,确定N的取值的方式较为简单。并且,也无需单独利用控制信息以指示N的取值,这样也就无需额外增加控制信息所占用的比特数。In the above embodiment, the terminal device can determine the number of physical shared channels associated with the first row index in the control information to obtain the value of N, without requiring the terminal device to perform complicated calculations to determine The way to get the value of N is relatively simple. Moreover, there is no need to use the control information alone to indicate the value of N, so there is no need to additionally increase the number of bits occupied by the control information.
在一种可能的实施方式中,所述控制信息还包括M个第一物理共享信道的第一HARQ进程号,所述第一HARQ进程号用于确定所述M个第一物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号;所述第一HARQ进程信息包括:第二HARQ进程号,所述第二HARQ进程号用于指示所述K个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号;或,第二HARQ进程号的偏移量,所述第二HARQ进程号的偏移量是指所述K个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号分别相对于所述第一HARQ进程号的偏移量。In a possible implementation manner, the control information further includes the first HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels, and the first HARQ process numbers are used to determine each of the M first physical shared channels. HARQ process number; the first HARQ process information includes: a second HARQ process number, the second HARQ process number is used to indicate the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels; or, the second HARQ process number The offset of the second HARQ process number refers to the offset of the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process number.
上述实施方式中,第二指示信息可指示HARQ进程号,这样终端设备可直接获得K个第二物理共享信道中的部分或全部第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。或者,由于HARQ进程号的偏移量一般来说比HARQ进程号所占用的比特数要少,因此第二指示信息指示HARQ进程号的偏移量,可相对节省第二指示信息所占用的比特数。In the above embodiment, the second indication information may indicate the HARQ process number, so that the terminal device can directly obtain the HARQ process numbers of some or all of the K second physical shared channels. Or, since the offset of the HARQ process number is generally less than the number of bits occupied by the HARQ process number, the second indication information indicates the offset of the HARQ process number, which can relatively save the bits occupied by the second indication information number.
在一种可能的实施方式中,在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述N个物理共享信道 所承载的传输单元均为重传,且所述N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元的上一次传输所采用的MCS均相同,所述传输单元为传输块(transport block,TB)、码块(code block,CB)或码块组(code block group,CBG)。In a possible implementation manner, when the N is greater than the M, the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels are all retransmissions, and the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels are respectively The MCS used in the previous transmission of the transmission unit is the same, and the transmission unit is a transport block (transport block, TB), a code block (code block, CB) or a code block group (code block group, CBG).
在上述实施方式中,N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元的上一次传输的MCS均相同,这样即使终端设备未获得N个物理共享信道中的一部分物理共享信道所承载的传输单元的上一次传输的MCS,终端设备也可根据N个物理共享信道中的另一部分物理共享信道所承载的传输单元的上一次传输的MCS,对上一次传输的一部分物理共享信道所承载的传输单元进行解调,提升了终端设备解调的可靠性。In the above embodiment, the MCS of the last transmission of the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels are all the same, so that even if the terminal device does not obtain the last transmission unit carried by a part of the N physical shared channels For the MCS of one transmission, the terminal device can also decode the transmission units carried by a part of the physical shared channels of the last transmission according to the MCS of the previous transmission of the transmission units carried by another part of the physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels. This improves the reliability of terminal equipment demodulation.
在一种可能的实施方式中,在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段还承载如下信息中的一种或多种:所述K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的新数据指示符NDI,其中所述至少一个第二物理共享信道的NDI用于指示所述一个第二物理共享信道用于新传或重传;或,所述N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量,所述MCS索引的偏移量是用于指示所述N个物理共享信道上分别所承载的传输单元采用的MCS索引相对于上一次传输所述传输单元采用的MCS索引的偏移量;或,所述K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的码块组刷新信息(code block group flush information,CBGFI),其中一个第二物理共享信道的CBGFI用于指示在所述一个第二物理共享信道上承载的传输单元是否与上一次传输的所述传输单元进行软合并。In a possible implementation manner, when the N is greater than the M, the first field further carries one or more of the following information: at least one of the K second physical shared channels A new data indicator NDI of a second physical shared channel, wherein the NDI of the at least one second physical shared channel is used to indicate that the one second physical shared channel is used for new transmission or retransmission; or, the N The offset of the MCS index of the physical shared channel, where the offset of the MCS index is used to indicate that the MCS index adopted by the transmission units respectively carried on the N physical shared channels is relative to the last transmission of the transmission unit The offset of the used MCS index; or, the code block group flush information (code block group flush information, CBGFI) of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels, where one second physical shared channel The CBGFI of the shared channel is used to indicate whether the transmission unit carried on the second physical shared channel is soft-combined with the transmission unit transmitted last time.
在上述实施方式中,在N大于M的情况下,第一字段除了承载第二指示信息,还可承载K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的NDI,N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量和K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的CBGFI中的一种或多种等这些信息,使得第一字段承载了更多的信息,可最大程度地使用第一字段,无需新增额外的字段以承载这些信息,相对可减少控制信息对应的字段。并且,第一字段还承载的这些信息,有利于终端设备更好地对N个物理共享信道上的传输单元进行解码。In the above embodiment, when N is greater than M, in addition to carrying the second indication information, the first field may also carry the NDI of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels, and the N physical shared channels One or more of the information such as the offset of the MCS index of the channel and the CBGFI of at least one second physical shared channel in the K second physical shared channels, so that the first field carries more information, which can be The first field is used to the greatest extent without adding additional fields to carry the information, and the fields corresponding to the control information can be relatively reduced. Moreover, the information carried by the first field is beneficial for the terminal device to better decode the transmission units on the N physical shared channels.
在一种可能的实施方式中,在所述N大于所述M,且所述第一字段不承载所述N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量的情况下,所述N个物理共享信道上分别所承载的传输单元所采用的MCS索引均相同,且与所述N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元的上一次传输所采用的MCS相同。In a possible implementation manner, when the N is greater than the M, and the first field does not carry the offset of the MCS index of the N physical shared channels, the N physical shared channels The MCS indexes adopted by the transmission units respectively carried on the channels are the same, and are the same as the MCS adopted by the last transmission of the transmission units respectively carried by the N physical shared channels.
在上述实施方式中,在第一字段未承载N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量的情况下,N个物理共享信道上分别所承载的传输单元所采用的MCS索引均相同,且与该N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元的上一次传输所采用的MCS相同,这样终端设备可直接根据上一次传输所采用的MCS,对本次N个物理共享信道上分别所承载的传输单元进行解调。并且,第一字段所需承载的信息更少,也相对减少了控制信息所占用的比特数。In the above embodiment, in the case that the first field does not carry the offsets of the MCS indexes of the N physical shared channels, the MCS indexes used by the transmission units respectively carried on the N physical shared channels are all the same, and are the same as The MCS used in the last transmission of the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels is the same, so that the terminal device can directly use the MCS used in the previous transmission to perform the transmission carried by the N physical shared channels this time. The unit is demodulated. Moreover, the first field needs to carry less information, which relatively reduces the number of bits occupied by the control information.
在一种可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:接收第三配置信息,所述第三配置信息用于配置第一解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS);根据所述第一DMRS对所述N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元进行解调。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: receiving third configuration information, where the third configuration information is used to configure a first demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS); according to the first DMRS Demodulate the transmission units respectively carried by the N physical shared channels.
在上述实施方式中,N个物理共享信道对应的DMRS可以是相同的,终端设备可根据一个DMRS,对N个物理共享信道进行解调,相对减少了终端设备接收的DMRS的个数。In the above embodiment, the DMRSs corresponding to the N physical shared channels may be the same, and the terminal device may demodulate the N physical shared channels according to one DMRS, which relatively reduces the number of DMRSs received by the terminal device.
在一种可能的实施方式中,所述控制信息还包括第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述N个物理共享信道的冗余版本RV,所述第三指示信息包括N个比特,在所述 N大于所述M的情况下,所述N个比特分别用于指示所述N个物理共享信道的RV。In a possible implementation manner, the control information further includes third indication information, the third indication information is used to indicate the redundancy versions RV of the N physical shared channels, and the third indication information includes N bits, and when the N is greater than the M, the N bits are respectively used to indicate the RVs of the N physical shared channels.
在上述实施方式中,终端设备可根据控制信息中的第三指示信息指示N个物理共享信道的RV,并且N个比特可分别用于指示N个物理共享信道的RV,一个物理共享信道的RV只需通过一个比特进行指示,有利于减少第三指示信息所占用的比特数。In the above embodiments, the terminal device can indicate the RVs of N physical shared channels according to the third indication information in the control information, and the N bits can be used to indicate the RVs of N physical shared channels and the RV of one physical shared channel respectively. It only needs to be indicated by one bit, which is beneficial to reduce the number of bits occupied by the third indication information.
在一种可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:根据所述N个物理共享信道的解码结果,分别确定N个第一HARQ应答信息,其中,所述N个第一HARQ应答信息的任意一个第一HARQ应答信息包含P比特,所述P比特中的任意一个比特用于指示对应物理共享信道所承载的一个传输单元进行的肯定应答ACK或否定应答NACK,P为正整数,所述传输单元为TB、CB或CBG;对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定,得到第二HARQ应答信息,所述空间绑定是对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息中的P比特中的同个位置上的比特进行逻辑与操作获得的,所述第二HARQ应答信息包括P比特;发送所述第二HARQ应答信息。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: respectively determining N pieces of first HARQ response information according to the decoding results of the N physical shared channels, wherein any of the N pieces of first HARQ response information A first HARQ response information includes P bits, any one of the P bits is used to indicate a positive acknowledgment ACK or a negative acknowledgment NACK performed by a transmission unit carried by the corresponding physical shared channel, P is a positive integer, and the transmission The unit is TB, CB or CBG; perform spatial binding on the N first HARQ response information to obtain second HARQ response information, and the spatial binding is the P bits in the N first HARQ response information The second HARQ response information includes P bits; and the second HARQ response information is sent.
在上述实施方式中,终端设备可根据N个物理共享信道中一个物理共享信道的解码结果,生成一个第一HARQ应答信息,以此类推,终端设备可根据N个物理共享信道的解码结果分别生成N个第一HARQ应答信息,并对N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定之后,生成包括P比特的第二HARQ应答信息,有利于减少终端设备发送的HARQ应答信息的个数,以及相对节省了N个物理共享信道所占用的比特数。In the above embodiment, the terminal device can generate a first HARQ response information according to the decoding result of one of the N physical shared channels, and so on, and the terminal device can generate the first HARQ response information according to the decoding results of the N physical shared channels respectively. N pieces of first HARQ response information, and after performing spatial binding on the N first HARQ response information, generate second HARQ response information including P bits, which is conducive to reducing the number of HARQ response information sent by the terminal device, and relatively The number of bits occupied by N physical shared channels is saved.
在一种可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:接收第四配置信息,所述第四配置信息包括第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示是否对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息进行所述空间绑定;所述发送所述第二HARQ应答信息,包括:若确定所述第四指示信息的取值为第一值,所述第一值指示对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息进行所述空间绑定,则发送所述第二HARQ应答信息;所述方法还包括:若确定所述第四指示信息的取值为第二值,所述第二值指示不对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息进行所述空间绑定,则发送所述N个第一HARQ应答信息。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: receiving fourth configuration information, where the fourth configuration information includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate whether to configure the N first The HARQ response information performs the space binding; the sending of the second HARQ response information includes: if it is determined that the value of the fourth indication information is a first value, the first value indicates that the N The first HARQ response information performs the spatial bundling, and then sends the second HARQ response information; the method further includes: if it is determined that the value of the fourth indication information is a second value, the second value indicates Sending the N first HARQ response information without performing the spatial bundling on the N first HARQ response information.
在上述实施方式中,终端设备可根据第四配置信息中的第四指示信息的取值,确定是否对N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定,以灵活指示终端设备对N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定。In the above embodiment, the terminal device can determine whether to spatially bind the N first HARQ response information according to the value of the fourth indication information in the fourth configuration information, so as to flexibly instruct the terminal device to perform spatial binding on the N first HARQ response information. Reply messages are spatially bound.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法可以由网络设备、或者网络设备上芯片、或者网络设备上的芯片组等执行,该方法也可以由终端设备、或者终端设备上芯片、或者终端设备上的芯片组等执行。该方法包括:发送控制信息,其中,所述控制信息用于调度N个物理共享信道,所述控制信息包括第一字段,所述N个物理共享信道包括M个第一物理共享信道,所述N和所述M均为正整数,在所述N等于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段承载第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述N个物理共享信道的MCS;在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段承载第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示K个第二物理共享信道的第一混合自动重传请求HARQ进程信息,所述K为正整数,所述K个第二物理共享信道为所述N个物理共享信道中除了所述M个第一物理共享信道之外的物理共享信道。In the second aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be executed by a network device, or a chip on a network device, or a chipset on a network device, etc., and can also be executed by a terminal device, or a chip on a terminal device , or the chipset on the terminal device, etc. The method includes: sending control information, wherein the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels, the control information includes a first field, the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels, the Both N and the M are positive integers, and when the N is equal to the M, the first field carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the N physical shared channels MCS: In the case where the N is greater than the M, the first field carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ of K second physical shared channels Process information, the K is a positive integer, and the K second physical shared channels are physical shared channels other than the M first physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels.
在一种可能的实施方式中,所述控制信息还包括码块组传输信息CBGTI,所述CBGTI用于指示所述N个物理共享信道重传的码组块CBG;所述方法还包括:发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置所述控制信息最大可调度的物理共享信道的个数。In a possible implementation manner, the control information further includes code block group transmission information CBGTI, and the CBGTI is used to indicate the code block CBG for retransmission of the N physical shared channels; the method further includes: sending First configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure the maximum number of physical shared channels that can be scheduled by the control information.
在一种可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:发送第二配置信息,其中,所述第二配置信息用于配置时域资源分配列表,所述时域资源分配列表包括至少一个行索引,以及包括所述至少一个行索引中每个行索引指示的至少一个物理共享信道各自的时域资源信息,所述至少一个行索引包括第一行索引,所述控制信息包括所述第一行索引,所述第一行索引用于指示时域资源分配列表中指示的物理共享信道的个数。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: sending second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used to configure a time domain resource allocation list, and the time domain resource allocation list includes at least one row index , and including time-domain resource information of at least one physical shared channel indicated by each row index in the at least one row index, the at least one row index includes a first row index, and the control information includes the first row Index, where the index in the first row is used to indicate the number of physical shared channels indicated in the time domain resource allocation list.
在一种可能的实施方式中,所述控制信息还包括M个第一物理共享信道的第一HARQ进程号,所述第一HARQ进程号用于确定所述M个第一物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号;所述第一HARQ进程信息包括:第二HARQ进程号,所述第二HARQ进程号用于指示所述K个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号;或,第二HARQ进程号的偏移量,所述第二HARQ进程号的偏移量是指所述K个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号分别相对于所述第一HARQ进程号的偏移量。In a possible implementation manner, the control information further includes the first HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels, and the first HARQ process numbers are used to determine each of the M first physical shared channels. HARQ process number; the first HARQ process information includes: a second HARQ process number, the second HARQ process number is used to indicate the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels; or, the second HARQ process number The offset of the second HARQ process number refers to the offset of the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process number.
在一种可能的实施方式中,在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述N个物理共享信道所承载的传输单元均为重传,且所述N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元的上一次传输所采用的MCS均相同,所述传输单元为传输块TB、码块CB或码块组CBG。In a possible implementation manner, when the N is greater than the M, the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels are all retransmissions, and the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels are respectively The MCS used in the last transmission of the transmission unit is the same, and the transmission unit is a transmission block TB, a code block CB or a code block group CBG.
在一种可能的实施方式中,在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段还承载如下信息中的一种或多种:所述K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的新数据指示符NDI,其中所述至少一个第二物理共享信道的NDI用于指示所述一个第二物理共享信道用于新传或重传;或,所述N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量,所述MCS索引的偏移量是用于指示所述N个物理共享信道上分别所承载的传输单元采用的MCS索引相对于上一次传输所述传输单元采用的MCS索引的偏移量;或,所述K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的码块组刷新信息CBGFI,其中一个第二物理共享信道的CBGFI用于指示在所述一个第二物理共享信道上承载的传输单元是否与上一次传输的所述传输单元进行软合并。In a possible implementation manner, when the N is greater than the M, the first field further carries one or more of the following information: at least one of the K second physical shared channels A new data indicator NDI of a second physical shared channel, wherein the NDI of the at least one second physical shared channel is used to indicate that the one second physical shared channel is used for new transmission or retransmission; or, the N The offset of the MCS index of the physical shared channel, where the offset of the MCS index is used to indicate that the MCS index adopted by the transmission units respectively carried on the N physical shared channels is relative to the last transmission of the transmission unit The offset of the MCS index used; or, the code block group refresh information CBGFI of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels, wherein the CBGFI of one second physical shared channel is used to indicate the Whether the transmission unit carried on the second physical shared channel is soft-combined with the transmission unit transmitted last time.
在一种可能的实施方式中,在所述N大于所述M,且所述第一字段不承载所述N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量的情况下,所述N个物理共享信道上分别所承载的传输单元所采用的MCS索引均相同,且与所述N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元的上一次传输所采用的MCS相同。In a possible implementation manner, when the N is greater than the M, and the first field does not carry the offset of the MCS index of the N physical shared channels, the N physical shared channels The MCS indexes adopted by the transmission units respectively carried on the channels are the same, and are the same as the MCS adopted by the last transmission of the transmission units respectively carried by the N physical shared channels.
在一种可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:发送第三配置信息,所述第三配置信息用于配置第一解调参考信号DMRS,所述第一DMRS用于对所述N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元进行解调。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: sending third configuration information, the third configuration information is used to configure a first demodulation reference signal DMRS, and the first DMRS is used for the N The transmission units carried by the physical shared channel are respectively demodulated.
在一种可能的实施方式中,所述控制信息还包括第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述N个物理共享信道的冗余版本RV,所述第三指示信息包括N个比特,在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述N个比特分别用于指示所述N个物理共享信道的RV。In a possible implementation manner, the control information further includes third indication information, the third indication information is used to indicate the redundancy versions RV of the N physical shared channels, and the third indication information includes N bits, and when the N is greater than the M, the N bits are respectively used to indicate the RVs of the N physical shared channels.
在一种可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:接收第二HARQ应答信息,其中,所述第二HARQ应答信息包含P比特,所述第二HARQ应答信息是对N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定得到的,所述N个第一HARQ应答信息是根据所述N个物理共享信道的解码结果确定的,所述空间绑定是对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息中的所述P比特中的同个位置上的比特进行逻辑与操作获得的,所述N个第一HARQ应答信息的任意一个第一HARQ应答信息包含P比特,所述P比特中的任意一个比特用于指示所述N个物理共享信道中的对应物理共享信道所承载的一个传输单元进行的肯定应答ACK或否定应答 NACK,所述P为正整数,所述传输单元为TB、CB或CBG。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: receiving second HARQ response information, wherein the second HARQ response information includes P bits, and the second HARQ response information is the N first HARQ response information The information is spatially bound, the N first HARQ response information is determined according to the decoding results of the N physical shared channels, and the spatial bundling is the N first HARQ response information The bit in the same position in the P bits is obtained by logical AND operation, any one of the first HARQ response information of the N first HARQ response information contains P bits, and any one of the P bits is used In order to indicate an acknowledgment ACK or a negative acknowledgment NACK performed by a transmission unit carried by a corresponding physical shared channel among the N physical shared channels, the P is a positive integer, and the transmission unit is TB, CB or CBG.
在一种可能的实施方式中,所述方法还包括:发送第四配置信息,所述第四配置信息包括第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示是否对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息进行所述空间绑定;接收第二HARQ应答信息,包括:若所述第四指示信息的取值为第一值,所述第一值指示对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息进行所述空间绑定,则接收所述第二HARQ应答信息;所述方法还包括:若所述第四指示信息的取值为第二值,所述第二值指示不对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息进行所述空间绑定若所述第四指示信息的取值为第二值,则接收N个所述第一HARQ应答信息。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: sending fourth configuration information, where the fourth configuration information includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate whether the N first The HARQ response information performs the space binding; receiving the second HARQ response information includes: if the value of the fourth indication information is a first value, the first value indicates the N first HARQ response information performing the spatial bundling, receiving the second HARQ response information; the method further includes: if the value of the fourth indication information is a second value, the second value indicates that the Nth performing the spatial bundling on one HARQ response message and receiving N pieces of the first HARQ response message if the value of the fourth indication information is the second value.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,该通信装置可以为上述第一方面中的终端设备,或者为配置在终端设备中的电子设备(例如,芯片系统),或者为包括该终端设备的较大设备。该终端设备包括用于执行上述第一方面或任一可选的实施方式的相应的手段(means)或模块。例如,该通信装置包括收发模块(有时也称为收发单元),可选的,该通信装置还包括处理模块(有时也称为处理单元)。In the third aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which can be the terminal device in the above first aspect, or an electronic device (such as a chip system) configured in the terminal device, or a communication device including the terminal device The larger device of the device. The terminal device includes corresponding means or modules for implementing the above first aspect or any optional implementation manner. For example, the communication device includes a transceiver module (also called a transceiver unit sometimes), and optionally, the communication device further includes a processing module (also called a processing unit sometimes).
例如,所述收发模块用于接收控制信息,所述控制信息用于调度N个物理共享信道,所述控制信息包括第一字段,所述N个物理共享信道包括M个第一物理共享信道,所述N和所述M均为正整数;其中,在所述N等于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段承载第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述N个物理共享信道的MCS;在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段承载第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示K个第二物理共享信道的第一混合自动重传请求HARQ进程信息,所述K为正整数,所述K个第二物理共享信道为所述N个物理共享信道中除了所述M个第一物理共享信道之外的物理共享信道。For example, the transceiver module is configured to receive control information, the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels, the control information includes a first field, and the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels, Both the N and the M are positive integers; wherein, when the N is equal to the M, the first field carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the N The MCS of the physical shared channel; when the N is greater than the M, the first field carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first hybrid automatic Retransmission request HARQ process information, the K is a positive integer, and the K second physical shared channels are physical shared channels except the M first physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,该通信装置可以为上述第二方面中的网络设备或终端设备,或者为配置在网络设备或终端设备中的电子设备(例如,芯片系统),或者为包括该网络设备或终端设备的较大设备。该网络设备或终端设备包括用于执行上述第二方面或任一可选的实施方式的相应的手段(means)或模块。例如,该通信装置包括收发模块(有时也称为收发单元),可选的,该通信装置还包括处理模块(有时也称为处理单元)。In the fourth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which may be the network device or terminal device in the above second aspect, or an electronic device (for example, a chip system) configured in the network device or terminal device , or a larger device including the network device or terminal device. The network device or terminal device includes corresponding means (means) or modules for implementing the above second aspect or any optional implementation manner. For example, the communication device includes a transceiver module (also called a transceiver unit sometimes), and optionally, the communication device further includes a processing module (also called a processing unit sometimes).
例如,所述收发模块用于发送控制信息,其中,所述控制信息用于调度N个物理共享信道,所述控制信息包括第一字段,所述N个物理共享信道包括M个第一物理共享信道,所述N和所述M均为正整数,在所述N等于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段承载第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述N个物理共享信道的调制与编码策略MCS;在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段承载第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示K个第二物理共享信道的第一混合自动重传请求HARQ进程信息,所述K为正整数,所述K个第二物理共享信道为所述N个物理共享信道中除了所述M个第一物理共享信道之外的物理共享信道。For example, the transceiver module is used to send control information, where the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels, the control information includes a first field, and the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels channel, the N and the M are both positive integers, and when the N is equal to the M, the first field carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the N The modulation and coding strategy MCS of the physical shared channel; in the case where the N is greater than the M, the first field carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate K second physical shared channels First Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request HARQ process information, the K is a positive integer, and the K second physical shared channels are physical physical shared channels other than the M first physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels shared channel.
第五方面,提供一种通信装置,包括:处理器和存储器;所述存储器用于存储一个或多个计算机程序,所述一个或多个计算机程序包括计算机执行指令,当所述通信装置运行时,所述处理器执行所述存储器存储的所述一个或多个计算机程序,以使得所述通信装置执行如第一方面或任一可选的实施方式中的方法,或者执行如第二方面或任一可选的实施方式中的方法。In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided, including: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store one or more computer programs, the one or more computer programs include computer-executable instructions, and when the communication device is running , the processor executes the one or more computer programs stored in the memory, so that the communication device executes the method in the first aspect or any optional implementation manner, or executes the method in the second aspect or The method in any of the alternative embodiments.
可选的,该通信装置还包括其他部件,例如,天线,输入输出模块,接口等等。这些部件可以是硬件,软件,或者软件和硬件的结合。Optionally, the communication device further includes other components, for example, an antenna, an input and output module, an interface, and the like. These components can be hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序包括程序指令,所述程序指令当被计算机执行时,使所述计算机执行如第一方面或任一可选的实施方式中的方法,或者执行如第二方面或任一可选的实施方式中的方法。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product stores a computer program, the computer program includes program instructions, and when the program instructions are executed by a computer, the computer executes the following steps: The method in one aspect or any optional implementation, or perform the method in the second aspect or any optional implementation.
第七方面,本申请提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,还可以包括存储器,用于实现如第一方面或任一可选的实施方式中的方法,或者执行如第二方面或任一可选的实施方式中的方法。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a chip system, the chip system includes a processor, and may also include a memory, for implementing the method in the first aspect or any optional implementation manner, or executing the method in the second aspect Or the method in any optional embodiment. The system-on-a-chip may consist of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
上述第二方面至第七方面及其实现方式的有益效果可以参考对第一方面的方法及其实施方式的有益效果的描述。For the beneficial effects of the above-mentioned second aspect to the seventh aspect and their implementation manners, reference may be made to the description of the beneficial effects of the method of the first aspect and its implementation manners.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为采用HARQ机制的传输数据的一种流程示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic flow diagram of transmitting data using a HARQ mechanism;
图2为传输块的一种划分示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of division of transport blocks;
图3为时分复用下的一种传输示意图;Fig. 3 is a kind of transmission schematic diagram under time division multiplexing;
图4为本申请实施例适用的一种场景示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a scenario applicable to an embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请实施例适用的另一种场景示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of another scenario applicable to the embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的2个物理共享信道的时频资源配置示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of time-frequency resource configuration of two physical shared channels provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的对N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定的过程示意图;FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a process of spatially bundling N first HARQ response information provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的一种结构示意图一;FIG. 9 is a first structural schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的一种结构示意图二;FIG. 10 is a second structural schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的一种结构示意图三;FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram III of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的一种结构示意图四。FIG. 12 is a fourth structural schematic diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
为了使本申请的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚,下面将结合附图对本申请作进一步地详细描述。方法实施例中的具体操作方法也可以应用于装置实施例或系统实施例中。In order to make the purpose, technical solution and advantages of the application clearer, the application will be further described in detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings. The specific operation methods in the method embodiments can also be applied to the device embodiments or system embodiments.
以下,对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明,以便于本领域技术人员理解。In the following, some terms used in the embodiments of the present application are explained, so as to facilitate the understanding of those skilled in the art.
1、本申请实施例中的终端设备,可称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、终端、接入站、UE站、远方站、无线通信设备、或用户装置等,终端设备是一种具有无线收发功能的设备,可以是固定设备,移动设备、手持设备、穿戴设备、车载设备,或内置于上述设备中的无线装置(例如,通信模块或芯片系统等)。终端设备用于连接人,物,机器等,可广泛用于各种场景,例如包括但不限于以下场景:蜂窝通信、设备到设备通信(device-to-device,D2D)、车到一切(vehicle to everything,V2X)、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications,M2M/MTC)、物联网(internet of things,IoT)、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)、工业控制(industrial control)、无人驾驶(self-driving)、远程医疗(remote medical)、智能电网(smart grid)、 智能家具、智能办公、智能穿戴、智能交通,智慧城市(smart city)、无人机、机器人等场景的终端设备。终端可以是手机、平板电脑、带无线收发功能的电脑、可穿戴设备、车辆、无人机、直升机、飞机、轮船、机器人、机械臂、智能家居设备等。本申请的实施例对终端设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不作限定。为描述方便,本申请实施例中将终端设备以UE为例进行说明。1. The terminal equipment in the embodiment of the present application may be called user equipment (UE), terminal, access station, UE station, remote station, wireless communication equipment, or user device, etc. The terminal equipment is a kind of A device with a wireless transceiver function may be a fixed device, a mobile device, a handheld device, a wearable device, a vehicle-mounted device, or a wireless device (such as a communication module or a chip system, etc.) built into the above-mentioned devices. Terminal devices are used to connect people, objects, machines, etc., and can be widely used in various scenarios, including but not limited to the following scenarios: cellular communication, device-to-device communication (device-to-device, D2D), vehicle-to-everything (vehicle to everything, V2X), machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC), Internet of Things (IoT), virtual reality (VR), augmented Augmented reality (AR), industrial control, self-driving, remote medical, smart grid, smart furniture, smart office, smart wear, smart transportation, Terminal equipment for scenarios such as smart cities, drones, and robots. Terminals can be mobile phones, tablet computers, computers with wireless transceiver functions, wearable devices, vehicles, drones, helicopters, airplanes, ships, robots, robotic arms, smart home devices, etc. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific technology and specific device form adopted by the terminal device. For the convenience of description, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device is taken as an example for description.
2、本申请实施例中的网络设备,例如包括接入网设备(或者,称为接入网网元),和/或核心网设备(或者,称为核心网网元)。2. The network device in the embodiment of the present application includes, for example, an access network device (or called an access network element), and/or a core network device (or called a core network element).
所述接入网设备为具有无线收发功能的设备,用于与所述终端设备进行通信。所述(无线)接入网((radio)access network,(R)AN)设备包括但不限于上述通信系统中的基站(BTS,Node B,eNodeB/eNB,或gNodeB/gNB)、收发点(t(R)ANsmission reception point,TRP),第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)后续演进的基站,无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)系统中的接入节点,无线中继节点,无线回传节点等。所述基站可以是:宏基站,微基站,微微基站,小站,中继站等。多个基站可以支持上述提及的同一种接入技术的网络,也可以支持上述提及的不同接入技术的网络。基站可以包含一个或多个共站或非共站的传输接收点。网络设备还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,C(R)AN)场景下的无线控制器、集中单元(centralized unit,CU),和/或分布单元(distributed unit,DU)。网络设备还可以是服务器,可穿戴设备,或车载设备等。例如,车到一切(vehicle to everything,V2X)技术中的网络设备可以为路侧单元(road side unit,RSU)。以下对接入网设备以为基站为例进行说明。所述通信系统中的多个网络设备可以为同一类型的基站,也可以为不同类型的基站。基站可以与终端设备进行通信,也可以通过中继站与终端设备进行通信。终端设备可以与不同接入技术中的多个基站进行通信。The access network device is a device with a wireless transceiver function, and is used for communicating with the terminal device. The (wireless) access network ((radio) access network, (R)AN) equipment includes but is not limited to the base station (BTS, Node B, eNodeB/eNB, or gNodeB/gNB) in the above-mentioned communication system, the transceiver point ( t(R)ANsmission reception point, TRP), the base station of the subsequent evolution of the third generation partnership project (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP), the access node in the wireless fidelity (wireless fidelity, WiFi) system, and the wireless relay node , wireless backhaul nodes, etc. The base station may be: a macro base station, a micro base station, a pico base station, a small station, a relay station, and the like. Multiple base stations may support the aforementioned networks of the same access technology, or may support the aforementioned networks of different access technologies. A base station may contain one or more co-sited or non-co-sited transmission and reception points. The network device may also be a wireless controller, a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU), and/or a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) in a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, C(R)AN) scenario. The network device can also be a server, a wearable device, or a vehicle-mounted device, etc. For example, a network device in a vehicle to everything (V2X) technology may be a road side unit (RSU). In the following, the base station is used as an example for the access network device to be described. The multiple network devices in the communication system may be base stations of the same type, or base stations of different types. The base station can communicate with the terminal equipment, and can also communicate with the terminal equipment through the relay station. A terminal device can communicate with multiple base stations in different access technologies.
所述核心网设备用于实现移动管理,数据处理,会话管理,策略和计费等功能中的至少一项。不同接入技术的系统中实现核心网功能的设备名称可以不同,本申请实施例并不对此进行限定。以5G系统为例,所述核心网设备包括:接入和移动管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)、或用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)等。The core network equipment is used to implement at least one of functions such as mobility management, data processing, session management, policy and charging. The names of devices implementing core network functions in systems with different access technologies may be different, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. Taking the 5G system as an example, the core network equipment includes: access and mobility management function (access and mobility management function, AMF), or user plane function (user plane function, UPF), etc.
本申请实施例中,用于实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备,也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置,例如芯片系统,该装置可以被安装在网络设备中。在本申请实施例提供的技术方案中,以用于实现网络设备的功能的装置是网络设备为例,描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。In the embodiment of the present application, the device for realizing the function of the network device may be a network device, or a device capable of supporting the network device to realize the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the network device. In the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application, the technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is described by taking the network device as an example for realizing the function of the network device.
3、本申请实施例中的物理共享信道,可简称为信道,例如包括PDSCH、物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)或物理侧链路共享信道(physical sidelink shared channel,PSSCH)中的一种或多种。3. The physical shared channel in the embodiment of the present application may be simply referred to as a channel, for example, including PDSCH, physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) or physical sidelink shared channel (physical sidelink shared channel, PSSCH) one or more.
4、本申请实施例中的传输单元,是指物理共享信道上所承载的单位数据,例如为传输块(transport block,TB)、码块(code block,CB)或码块组(code block group,CBG)。4. The transmission unit in the embodiment of the present application refers to the unit data carried on the physical shared channel, such as a transport block (transport block, TB), a code block (code block, CB) or a code block group (code block group) , CBG).
5、本申请实施例中的TB,一个TB可以作为传输单元。或者,一个TB可被划分为多个码块(code block,CB),这种情况下,一个CB可作为传输单元。多个CB可组成码块组(code block group,CBG),这种情况下,一个CBG可作为传输单元。目前,在3GPP TS 38.331中规定了,发送端可通过高层信令中的每个TB包括的最大代码块组(maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock)字段向接收端指示每个TB包括的CBG的数量,例如,每个TB包括2、4、6或8个CBG。5. As for the TB in the embodiment of the present application, one TB can be used as a transmission unit. Or, a TB can be divided into multiple code blocks (code block, CB), in this case, a CB can be used as a transmission unit. Multiple CBs can form a code block group (CBG). In this case, a CBG can be used as a transmission unit. Currently, it is specified in 3GPP TS 38.331 that the sender can indicate to the receiver the number of CBGs included in each TB through the maximum code block group (maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock) field included in each TB in the high-level signaling, for example, each TB Includes 2, 4, 6 or 8 CBGs.
本申请实施例中,对于名词的数目,除非特别说明,表示“单数名词或复数名词”,即“一个或多个”。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。例如,A/B,表示:A或B。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),表示:a,b,c,a和b,a和c,b和c,或a和b和c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。In the embodiments of the present application, as for the number of nouns, unless otherwise specified, it means "singular noun or plural noun", that is, "one or more". "At least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there can be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or" relationship. For example, A/B means: A or B. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items. For example, at least one item (piece) of a, b, or c means: a, b, c, a and b, a and c, b and c, or a and b and c, where a, b, c Can be single or multiple.
除非有特定的说明,本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词用于对多个对象进行区分,不用于限定多个对象的顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度,例如,本申请实施例中的“第一指示信息”和“第二指示信息”可以是同一个指示信息,也可以是不同的指示信息,且这种表述方式并不用于限定这两个指示信息的传输顺序、优先级或重要程度等的不同。Unless otherwise specified, ordinal numerals such as "first" and "second" mentioned in the embodiments of this application are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the order, timing, priority or importance of multiple objects. For example, the "first indication information" and "second indication information" in the embodiment of the present application may be the same indication information or different indication information, and this expression is not used to limit these two indication information The order of transmission, priority or importance of the transmission is different.
在本申请实施例中,“指示”可以理解为显式地指示和/或隐式地指示。例如,A显式地指示了B,例如可理解为读取A便可获得B。例如,A为第二指示信息,B为K个第二物理共享信道的HARQ信息,A显式地指示B,可理解为读取该第二指示信息,便可获得K个第二物理共享信道中每个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程信息,K为正整数。A隐式地指示B,例如可理解为读取A便可获得C,根据C进而获得B,其中C可能与B不同,C也可能属于B的一部分。此外,“指示”还可以理解为“包含”,例如,第一指示信息用于指示N个物理共享信道的调制与编码策略(modulation and coding scheme,MCS),也可以表述为:第一指示信息包含N个物理共享信道的MCS,N为正整数。或者,“指示”与“包含”也可以是不同的含义,例如A指示B,并不能理解为A包含B,只能理解为根据A能够确定B。In this embodiment of the present application, "indication" may be interpreted as an explicit indication and/or an implicit indication. For example, A explicitly indicates B, for example, it can be understood that B can be obtained by reading A. For example, A is the second indication information, B is the HARQ information of K second physical shared channels, and A explicitly indicates B, which can be understood as reading the second indication information to obtain K second physical shared channels HARQ process information of each second physical shared channel in K is a positive integer. A implicitly indicates B. For example, it can be understood that reading A can obtain C, and then obtain B based on C, where C may be different from B, and C may also be a part of B. In addition, "indication" can also be understood as "include", for example, the first indication information is used to indicate the modulation and coding scheme (modulation and coding scheme, MCS) of N physical shared channels, and can also be expressed as: the first indication information An MCS including N physical shared channels, where N is a positive integer. Alternatively, "indicate" and "include" may also have different meanings, for example, A indicates B, and it cannot be understood that A includes B, but only that B can be determined according to A.
除非有特定的说明,本申请实施例中,“多个A的B信息”可包括如下(1)~(4)中的任意一种情况:(1)多个B信息,一个B信息对应一个A,且多个A中任意两个A对应的B信息均相同;(2)一个B信息,且多个A中任意两个A的B信息均相同;(3)多个B信息,其中一个B信息对应一个A,这多个B信息可不完全相同,例如,多个B信息中至少有一个B信息与其他B信息不同;(4)部分A的B信息,且一个B信息对应一个A,根据该部分A的B信息,可确定出多个A中的每个A对应的B信息,且多个A中至少存在两个A对应的B信息不相同。Unless otherwise specified, in the embodiment of this application, "multiple B information of A" may include any of the following situations (1) to (4): (1) Multiple B information, one B information corresponds to one A, and the B information corresponding to any two A in multiple A are the same; (2) A B information, and the B information of any two A in multiple A are the same; (3) Multiple B information, one of which The B information corresponds to one A, and the multiple B information may not be exactly the same, for example, at least one B information among the multiple B information is different from other B information; (4) Part of the B information of A, and one B information corresponds to one A, According to the B information of the part A, the B information corresponding to each of the multiple A's can be determined, and the B information corresponding to at least two A's among the multiple A's is different.
为便于理解,下面对HARQ机制、基于CBG的传输方案的基本概念进行介绍。For ease of understanding, the basic concepts of the HARQ mechanism and the CBG-based transmission scheme are introduced below.
一、HARQ机制。1. HARQ mechanism.
HARQ机制是一种结合了前向纠错码(forward error correction,FEC)算法和自动重传请求(automatic repeat request,ARQ)机制的重传机制。HARQ机制的基本原理可参照前文。下面对FEC算法和ARQ机制分别进行介绍。The HARQ mechanism is a retransmission mechanism that combines a forward error correction code (forward error correction, FEC) algorithm and an automatic repeat request (automatic repeat request, ARQ) mechanism. The basic principle of the HARQ mechanism can be referred to above. The FEC algorithm and the ARQ mechanism are introduced respectively below.
(1)、FEC算法,是一种差错控制方式,FEC算法是指按照一定的算法,对待发送的数据进行编码处理,并在该数据中添加冗余数据。接收端按照相应的FEC算法对接收到的数据进行解码,并根据其中的冗余数据,纠正在传输过程中产生的错误并将其纠正的技术。(1) The FEC algorithm is an error control method. The FEC algorithm refers to performing encoding processing on the data to be sent according to a certain algorithm, and adding redundant data to the data. The receiving end decodes the received data according to the corresponding FEC algorithm, and corrects the errors generated during the transmission according to the redundant data and corrects them.
(2)、ARQ重传机制,是指接收端可通过循环冗余校验(cyclic redundancy check,CRC)算法判断接收到的数据是否正确,并将判断结果发送给发送端。如果发送端确定判断结果 指示接收错误,那么发送端可重新发送该数据,直到接收端正确接收数据为止。(2) The ARQ retransmission mechanism means that the receiving end can judge whether the received data is correct through the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) algorithm, and send the judgment result to the sending end. If the sending end determines that the judgment result indicates a reception error, the sending end can resend the data until the receiving end receives the data correctly.
HARQ机制融合了FEC算法和ARQ重传机制的优势。另外,HARQ机制还可支持软合并。软合并是指接收端可将接收到的错误数据保存在一个HARQ缓存(buffer)中,接收端可将缓存中的错误数据并与后续接收到的重传数据进行合并,从而得到一个更为可靠的数据。软合并技术可实现两种增益,一种是重传原始比特时所带来的信号能量的增益,其中,原始比特用于指示待发送的数据;一种是重传原始比特时发送额外的校验比特所带来的编码增益,其中,校验比特用于指示冗余数据。The HARQ mechanism combines the advantages of the FEC algorithm and the ARQ retransmission mechanism. In addition, the HARQ mechanism can also support soft combining. Soft combining means that the receiving end can store the received error data in a HARQ buffer, and the receiving end can combine the error data in the buffer with the subsequently received retransmission data to obtain a more reliable The data. Soft combining technology can achieve two kinds of gains, one is the gain of signal energy brought by retransmitting the original bits, where the original bits are used to indicate the data to be sent; the other is sending additional correction data when retransmitting the original bits. Coding gain brought by parity bits, where parity bits are used to indicate redundant data.
在新空口(new radio,NR)传输中,根据重传的编码比特集与初传的编码比特集是否相同,软合并可以分为追逐合并(chase combining,CC)方案和增量冗余(incremental redundancy,IR)方案。其中,编码比特集用于指示待发送的数据和冗余数据。在CC方案中重传的编码比特集与初传的编码比特集相同,在IR方案中重传的编码比特集无需与初传的编码比特集相同。In new radio (NR) transmission, according to whether the coded bit set for retransmission is the same as that for initial transmission, soft combining can be divided into chase combining (CC) scheme and incremental redundancy (incremental redundancy). redundancy, IR) program. Wherein, the coded bit set is used to indicate data to be sent and redundant data. The coded bit set for retransmission in the CC scheme is the same as the coded bit set for the initial transmission, and the coded bit set for retransmission in the IR scheme does not need to be the same as the coded bit set for the initial transmission.
在CC方案中,发送端对用于表示原始比特进行CRC,生成校验比特,对原始比特和校验比特进行编码,获得编码比特集。无论初传还是重传发送端都是向接收端发送该编码比特集。In the CC scheme, the sender performs CRC on the original bits used to represent them, generates parity bits, encodes the original bits and parity bits, and obtains a coded bit set. Regardless of initial transmission or retransmission, the sending end sends the coded bit set to the receiving end.
在IR方案中,IR中可以生成多个不同的编码比特集,每个编码比特集用于指示的待发送的数据是相同的,但任意两个编码比特集所对应的校验比特是不同的。每次重传时,发送端可传输与前一次不同的编码比特集。接收端会把重传的编码比特集与上一次传输的编码比特集进行合并。每次重传的编码比特集称为一个冗余版本(redundancy version,RV)。在IR方案中,随着重传次数的增加,接收端会不断累积冗余信息,从而根据累积的冗余信息,获得更好的解码效果。In the IR scheme, multiple different coded bit sets can be generated in the IR, and the data to be sent indicated by each coded bit set is the same, but the parity bits corresponding to any two coded bit sets are different . For each retransmission, the sender can transmit a different coded bit set than the previous one. The receiving end will combine the coded bit set of the retransmission with the coded bit set of the previous transmission. The set of coded bits for each retransmission is called a redundancy version (RV). In the IR scheme, as the number of retransmissions increases, the receiver will continue to accumulate redundant information, so as to obtain better decoding results based on the accumulated redundant information.
下面对基于HARQ机制的传输过程进行简要介绍。The following briefly introduces the transmission process based on the HARQ mechanism.
发送端通过HARQ进程发送数据,接收端通过HARQ进程接收数据。HARQ进程可采用停止等待协议(stop-and-wait protocol)传输数据。停止等待协议是指发送端每发送完一个TB停止发送,直到确认接收端成功接收该TB之后,再发送下一个TB。The sending end sends data through the HARQ process, and the receiving end receives data through the HARQ process. The HARQ process may transmit data using a stop-and-wait protocol. The stop-and-wait protocol means that the sender stops sending each time a TB is sent, and then sends the next TB after confirming that the receiver has successfully received the TB.
请参照图1,为采用HARQ机制的传输数据的一种流程示意图。图1中是以HARQ机制支持IR方案、以TB为传输单元为例进行介绍。Please refer to FIG. 1 , which is a schematic flow chart of data transmission using the HARQ mechanism. In FIG. 1 , the HARQ mechanism supports the IR solution and the TB is taken as an example for an introduction.
步骤11,发送端向接收端发送TB0 RV0。 Step 11, the sender sends TB0 RV0 to the receiver.
其中,TB0用于表示传输的第一个TB,RV0可理解为传输的TB的第一个冗余版本,TB0 RV0用于表示传输的第一个TB的第一个冗余版本。Among them, TB0 is used to indicate the first TB transmitted, RV0 can be understood as the first redundant version of the transmitted TB, and TB0 RV0 is used to indicate the first redundant version of the first TB transmitted.
步骤12,如果接收端接收TB0 RV0失败,则向发送端反馈NACK。 Step 12, if the receiving end fails to receive TB0 RV0, feedback NACK to the sending end.
步骤13,发送端向接收端发送TB0 RV1。 Step 13, the sender sends TB0 RV1 to the receiver.
步骤14,如果接收端接收TB0 RV1成功,则向发送端反馈ACK。 Step 14, if the receiving end successfully receives TB0 RV1, it will feed back ACK to the sending end.
其中,RV1可理解为传输的TB的第二个冗余版本,TB0 RV1用于表示传输的第一个TB的第二个冗余版本。Among them, RV1 can be understood as the second redundant version of the transmitted TB, and TB0 RV1 is used to represent the second redundant version of the first TB transmitted.
步骤15,发送端向接收端发送TB1 RV0。 Step 15, the sender sends TB1 RV0 to the receiver.
其中,TB1用于表示传输的第二个TB,TB1 RV0用于表示传输的第二个TB的第一个冗余版本。Among them, TB1 is used to indicate the second TB transmitted, and TB1 RV0 is used to indicate the first redundant version of the second TB transmitted.
步骤16,如果接收端接收TB1 RV0成功,则向发送端反馈ACK。 Step 16, if the receiving end successfully receives TB1 RV0, it will feed back ACK to the sending end.
需要说明的是,在CC方案中,不涉及RV的概念,即每次重传和初传的编码比特集 相同,例如,发送端发送TB0,接收端接收TB0失败,向发送端反馈NACK,发送端可将TB0重传给接收端,发送端重传的TB0与初传的TB0相同。It should be noted that in the CC scheme, the concept of RV is not involved, that is, the coded bit set of each retransmission is the same as that of the initial transmission. The end can retransmit TB0 to the receiving end, and the TB0 retransmitted by the sending end is the same as the TB0 originally transmitted.
下面对基于CBG的传输方案进行介绍。The CBG-based transmission scheme is introduced below.
二、基于CBG的传输。2. CBG-based transmission.
基于CBG的传输是指以CBG作为传输单元的传输。其中,一个CBG包括多个CB。基于CBG的传输具体是指发送端以CBG为单位进行传输,相应的,接收端也是以CBG为单位向发送端发送HARQ应答。基于CBG的传输方案中发送端是以CBG为单位进行重传,这相比重传整个TB,可减少资源的消耗;基于CBG的传输方案是以CBG为单位进行重传,相比重传CB,重传的次数相对更少,且接收端进行HARQ应答的次数也相对更少,从而可减小信令开销。CBG-based transmission refers to transmission using CBG as a transmission unit. Wherein, one CBG includes multiple CBs. The CBG-based transmission specifically means that the sending end performs transmission in units of CBG, and correspondingly, the receiving end also sends a HARQ response to the sending end in units of CBG. In the CBG-based transmission scheme, the sender retransmits in units of CBG, which can reduce resource consumption compared to retransmitting the entire TB; in the CBG-based transmission scheme, retransmission is performed in units of CBG. The number of transmissions is relatively less, and the number of HARQ responses at the receiving end is relatively less, so that the signaling overhead can be reduced.
例如,请参照图2,为TB的一种划分示意图。如图2所示,该TB可划分为4个CBG(如图2中的CBG0、CBG1、CBG2和CBG3)。其中,CBG0包括CB0和CB1;CBG1包括CB2和CB3;CBG2包括CB4和CB5;CBG3包括CB6和CB7。如果发送端无法正确解码某个CB,那么发送端重传该CB所在的CBG即可。例如,接收端无法正确解码CB4(在图2中是以“×”表示接收端解码CB4失败),那么发送端可重传该CB4所在的CBG,即CBG2。For example, please refer to FIG. 2 , which is a schematic diagram of a division of TB. As shown in Figure 2, the TB can be divided into four CBGs (CBG0, CBG1, CBG2 and CBG3 in Figure 2). Among them, CBG0 includes CB0 and CB1; CBG1 includes CB2 and CB3; CBG2 includes CB4 and CB5; CBG3 includes CB6 and CB7. If the sender cannot correctly decode a certain CB, then the sender only needs to retransmit the CBG where the CB is located. For example, if the receiving end cannot correctly decode CB4 ("X" in FIG. 2 indicates that the receiving end fails to decode CB4), then the sending end can retransmit the CBG where the CB4 is located, that is, CBG2.
下面以下行传输场景,发送端以基站,接收端以UE,以每个TB包括的最大CBG的数量为4为例,对目前提供的指示HARQ进程的方式进行示例介绍。In the following downlink transmission scenario, the base station is used as the sending end, the UE is used as the receiving end, and the maximum number of CBGs included in each TB is 4 as an example to introduce the currently provided methods of indicating the HARQ process.
请参照图3,表示时分复用(time division duplex,TDD)下的一种传输示意图。一个TDD周期包括10个时隙,其中包括8个下行时隙(如图3所示的D01-D07,或者D10-D17,其中D14-D17在图3中未示意),以及2个上行时隙(如图3所示的U00-U01或U10-U11)。Please refer to FIG. 3, which shows a schematic diagram of transmission under time division duplex (TDD). A TDD cycle includes 10 time slots, including 8 downlink time slots (D01-D07 as shown in Figure 3, or D10-D17, where D14-D17 is not shown in Figure 3), and 2 uplink time slots (U00-U01 or U10-U11 as shown in Figure 3).
基站在一个下行时隙上调度一个TB的传输,例如在D00-D05的各个时隙上分别调度了TB0-TB5,每个TB包括4个CBG(如CBG0-CBG3)。The base station schedules the transmission of one TB on one downlink time slot, for example, TB0-TB5 are scheduled on each time slot of D00-D05, and each TB includes 4 CBGs (such as CBG0-CBG3).
具体的,基站在D00处向UE发送TB0的CBG1和CBG2,UE解码失败,UE解码TB0除了CBG1和CBG2之外的其他CBG均成功。基站在D03处向UE发送TB3的CBG2,UE解码失败,UE解码TB3除了CBG2之外的其他CBG均成功。另外,UE解码TB1、TB2、TB4和TB5中的所有CBG均成功。其中,在图3中并未示意TB0-TB5对应的HARQ应答信息。UE将TB0-TB5各自的HARQ应答信息均通在U00处发送给基站。基站接收TB0-TB5各自的HARQ应答信息之后,基站可以在D12处为调度TB0中的CBG1和CBG2的重传,在D13处调度TB3的CBG2的重传。Specifically, the base station sends CBG1 and CBG2 of TB0 to the UE at D00, the UE fails to decode, and the UE decodes all CBGs of TB0 except CBG1 and CBG2 successfully. The base station sends the CBG2 of TB3 to the UE at D03, the UE fails to decode, and the UE decodes all CBGs of TB3 except CBG2 successfully. In addition, the UE successfully decodes all CBGs in TB1, TB2, TB4 and TB5. Wherein, the HARQ response information corresponding to TB0-TB5 is not shown in FIG. 3 . The UE sends the respective HARQ response information of TB0-TB5 to the base station at U00. After the base station receives the respective HARQ response information of TB0-TB5, the base station can schedule the retransmission of CBG1 and CBG2 in TB0 at D12, and schedule the retransmission of CBG2 of TB3 at D13.
目前的这种方式可能会导致三个问题。其一,基站在调度TB0和TB3的重传时,需要2个DCI分别调度2个时隙(如D12和D13),基站的信令开销较大。其二,在2个时隙调度2个TB的CBG的重传,重传占用了过多的时隙,有可能加重数据重传对数据传输的时延影响。例如,在D13处重传的TB3对应的时隙超出空口时延预算(packet delay budget,PDB),则即使TB3在D13处解码正确,可能也已经影响了用户的体验。其三,UE需要盲检多个DCI,这也会造成UE的功耗较大。The current approach may lead to three problems. Firstly, when the base station schedules the retransmission of TB0 and TB3, two DCIs are required to schedule two time slots (such as D12 and D13) respectively, and the signaling overhead of the base station is relatively large. Second, the retransmission of the CBG of 2 TB is scheduled in 2 time slots, and the retransmission occupies too many time slots, which may aggravate the delay impact of data retransmission on data transmission. For example, if the time slot corresponding to TB3 retransmitted at D13 exceeds the air interface delay budget (packet delay budget, PDB), even if TB3 is decoded correctly at D13, the user experience may have been affected. Thirdly, the UE needs to blindly detect multiple DCIs, which will also cause high power consumption of the UE.
为此,本申请实施例提供一种技术方案。该技术方案中,接收端从发送端接收控制信息。该控制信息可用于调度N个物理共享信道,N为正整数,N个物理共享信道包括M个第一物理共享信道。在N等于M的情况下,那么该控制信息中的第一字段承载第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示N个物理共享信道的MCS。在N大于M的情况下,那 么该第一字段承载第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示N个物理共享信道中除了M个第一物理共享信道之外的K个第二物理共享信道的第一HARQ进程信息,K和M均为正整数。该技术方案中,该控制信息可调度多个物理共享信道,相对于现有技术中一个控制信息仅调度一个物理共享信道的方式,该技术方案可相对节省信令的开销。并且,复用了控制信息中的第一字段,以指示K个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程信息或N个物理共享信道的MCS,这样相对节省了控制信息占用的比特数。并且,对于接收控制信息的接收端而言,需接收的控制信息的数量相对更少,可节省接收端的功耗。To this end, the embodiment of the present application provides a technical solution. In this technical solution, the receiving end receives control information from the sending end. The control information may be used to schedule N physical shared channels, where N is a positive integer, and the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels. In the case where N is equal to M, then the first field in the control information carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the MCS of the N physical shared channels. In the case where N is greater than M, the first field carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate K second physical shared channels in the N physical shared channels except the M first physical shared channels. The first HARQ process information of the channel, K and M are both positive integers. In this technical solution, the control information can schedule multiple physical shared channels. Compared with the way in the prior art that one control information only schedules one physical shared channel, this technical solution can relatively save signaling overhead. Moreover, the first field in the control information is multiplexed to indicate the HARQ process information of the K second physical shared channels or the MCS of the N physical shared channels, which relatively saves the number of bits occupied by the control information. Moreover, for the receiving end receiving the control information, the amount of control information to be received is relatively small, which can save the power consumption of the receiving end.
本申请实施例提供的技术方案可适用于任意采用HARQ机制的通信系统,例如,可以是第五代移动通信系统(the 5 th generation system,5GS),也可以为侧链路(sidelink)通信系统等,还可以是多种通信系统的混合架构。下面对本申请实施例适用的通信系统进行示例介绍。 The technical solution provided by the embodiment of the present application is applicable to any communication system using the HARQ mechanism, for example, it may be the 5th generation mobile communication system (the 5 th generation system, 5GS), or it may be a sidelink (sidelink) communication system etc., and may also be a hybrid architecture of various communication systems. An example of a communication system to which this embodiment of the present application is applicable is introduced below.
请参见图4,为本申请实施例适用的通信系统的一种示意图。该通信系统包括网络设备401和终端设备402。网络设备401和终端设备402之间可相互通信。例如,网络设备401向终端设备402发送控制信息(例如DCI),该控制信息用于调度N个物理共享信道。终端设备402接收该控制信息,并根据该控制信息,确定N个物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号。其中,网络设备401和终端设备402的具体实现方式可参照前文论述的内容、控制信息相关内容将在下文中论述。Please refer to FIG. 4 , which is a schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to this embodiment of the present application. The communication system includes a network device 401 and a terminal device 402 . The network device 401 and the terminal device 402 can communicate with each other. For example, the network device 401 sends control information (such as DCI) to the terminal device 402, where the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels. The terminal device 402 receives the control information, and determines the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels according to the control information. For the specific implementation manners of the network device 401 and the terminal device 402, reference may be made to the content discussed above, and the content related to control information will be discussed below.
请参照图5,为本申请实施例适用的通信系统的另一种示意图。该通信系统包括第一终端设备501和第二终端设备502。第一终端设备501和第二终端设备502可相互通信。例如,第一终端设备502向第二终端设备发送控制信息(例如侧链路控制信息(sidelink control information,SCI)),该控制信息用于调度N个物理共享信道。相应的,终端设备502接收该控制信息,并根据该控制信息,确定N个物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号。其中,第一终端设备501和第二终端设备502的具体实现方式可参照前文论述的内容、控制信息相关内容将在下文中论述。Please refer to FIG. 5 , which is another schematic diagram of a communication system applicable to this embodiment of the present application. The communication system includes a first terminal device 501 and a second terminal device 502 . The first terminal device 501 and the second terminal device 502 can communicate with each other. For example, the first terminal device 502 sends control information (such as sidelink control information (sidelink control information, SCI)) to the second terminal device, where the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels. Correspondingly, the terminal device 502 receives the control information, and determines the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels according to the control information. For the specific implementation manners of the first terminal device 501 and the second terminal device 502, reference may be made to the content discussed above, and the content related to control information will be discussed below.
需要说明的是,上述图4或图5是对本申请实施例适用的通信系统进行的示例,但本申请实施例中的技术方案所适用的通信系统包括但并不限于图4或图5所示的通信系统。It should be noted that the above-mentioned Figure 4 or Figure 5 is an example of the communication system applicable to the embodiment of the present application, but the communication system applicable to the technical solution in the embodiment of the application includes but is not limited to that shown in Figure 4 or Figure 5 communication system.
本申请实施例提供的技术方案可适用于通信系统中的任意类型的业务,例如5GS中的实时宽带通信(realt-time broadband conmmunication,RTBC)业务。其中,RTBC业务旨在支持大带宽和低交互时延。RTBC业务例如,扩展现实(extended reality,XR)业务,XR业务具体包括虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR),增强现实(augmented reality,AR)以及混合现实(mixed reality,MR)等业务。The technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are applicable to any type of service in the communication system, such as real-time broadband communication (realt-time broadband communication, RTBC) service in 5GS. Among them, the RTBC service is designed to support large bandwidth and low interaction delay. RTBC business, for example, extended reality (extended reality, XR) business, XR business specifically includes virtual reality (virtual reality, VR), augmented reality (augmented reality, AR) and mixed reality (mixed reality, MR) and other services.
下面结合附图对本申请实施例提供的通信方法进行具体说明。The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be specifically described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
请参见图6,为本申请实施例提供的通信方法的流程图。图6所示的实施例是以本申请实施例提供的通信方法适用于图4所示的通信系统、以发送端为网络设备、以接收端为终端设备为例。Please refer to FIG. 6 , which is a flow chart of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 , the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 4 , and the sending end is used as a network device, and the receiving end is used as a terminal device as an example.
S601,网络设备向终端设备发送第一配置信息。相应的,终端设备从网络设备接收该第一配置信息。该第一配置信息用于配置最大可调度的物理共享信道的个数。S601. The network device sends first configuration information to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first configuration information from the network device. The first configuration information is used to configure the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels.
例如,网络设备可在与终端设备建立无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)连接时,向终端设备发送该第一配置信息。第一配置信息例如包括在无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)消息中发送,或者也可以包括在其他消息中发送。例如,第一配置 信息可以是RRC中的PDSCH配置信息元素(PDSCH-Config information element)信息,网络设备可通过RRC消息中的通过PDSCH-Config information element中的DCI最大重传可调度的物理共享信道的个数(maxNrofRetransmissionScheduledByDCI)信令为终端设备配置最大可调度的物理共享信道的个数。For example, the network device may send the first configuration information to the terminal device when establishing a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) connection with the terminal device. For example, the first configuration information is sent in a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) message, or may also be sent in other messages. For example, the first configuration information may be PDSCH configuration information element (PDSCH-Config information element) information in RRC, and the network device may retransmit the schedulable physical shared channel through the DCI maximum retransmission in the PDSCH-Config information element in the RRC message The number of (maxNrofRetransmissionScheduledByDCI) signaling configures the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels for the terminal device.
例如maxNrofRetransmissionScheduledByDCI的取值为nL,表示DCI在一个时隙内最大可调度L个物理共享信道,L为正整数。最大可调度的物理共享信道的个数为L,意味着一个DCI可调度的物理共享信道的个数小于或等于L。For example, the value of maxNrofRetransmissionScheduledByDCI is nL, indicating that the DCI can schedule a maximum of L physical shared channels in one time slot, and L is a positive integer. The maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels is L, which means that the number of schedulable physical shared channels in one DCI is less than or equal to L.
需要说明的是,S601是以网络设备为终端设备配置最大可调度的物理共享信道的个数为例,但实际上终端设备获得该个数的方式有多种。例如,终端设备可被预配置该个数,或者,该个数也可以是协议规定的。It should be noted that S601 is an example in which the network device configures the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels for the terminal device, but actually there are multiple ways for the terminal device to obtain the number. For example, the terminal device may be pre-configured with the number, or the number may also be specified in the protocol.
S602,网络设备向终端设备发送第二配置信息。相应的,终端设备从网络设备接收该第二配置信息。该第二配置信息用于配置时域资源列表。S602. The network device sends second configuration information to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the second configuration information from the network device. The second configuration information is used to configure the time domain resource list.
无论网络设备每次调度多少个物理共享信道,该网络设备均可为终端设备预配置至少一个物理共享信道各自的时域资源。在本申请实施例中,网络设备可通过第二配置信息为终端设备配置至少一个物理共享信道各自的时域资源信息。例如,网络设备可在与终端设备建立RRC连接时,向终端设备发送该第二配置信息。No matter how many physical shared channels the network device schedules each time, the network device may pre-configure respective time domain resources of at least one physical shared channel for the terminal device. In this embodiment of the present application, the network device may configure time-domain resource information of at least one physical shared channel for the terminal device through the second configuration information. For example, the network device may send the second configuration information to the terminal device when establishing an RRC connection with the terminal device.
例如,第二配置信息可包括时域资源分配列表(time domain allocation list),该时域资源分配列表包括至少一个行索引(row index),以及包括至少一个行索引中的每个行索引指示的至少一个物理共享信道各自的时域资源信息,换言之,一个行索引可对应多个物理共享信道,每个物理共享信道有其对应的时域资源信息。至少一个物理共享信道是指被调度的物理共享信道。For example, the second configuration information may include a time domain resource allocation list (time domain allocation list), the time domain resource allocation list includes at least one row index (row index), and includes at least one row index indicated by each row index Time-domain resource information of at least one physical shared channel, in other words, one row index may correspond to multiple physical shared channels, and each physical shared channel has its corresponding time-domain resource information. At least one physical shared channel refers to a scheduled physical shared channel.
可选的,该时域资源分配列表还包括至少一个物理共享信道的解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)的时域位置和至少一个物理共享信道的映射类型(mapping type)。mapping type包括type A和type B。Optionally, the time-domain resource allocation list further includes a time-domain position of a demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS) of at least one physical shared channel and a mapping type (mapping type) of at least one physical shared channel. The mapping type includes type A and type B.
其中,type A的映射方式用于时隙型调度的物理共享信道。以时隙型调度的物理共享信道对应采用正常(normal)循环前缀(cyclic prefix,CP)为例,那么该时隙型调度的物理共享信道的起始符号通常位于一个时隙的前4个符号内,且该时隙型调度的物理共享信道所占用的符号数可为3-14个符号,该时隙型调度的物理共享信道的DMRS可位于一个时隙的第2或第3个符号上。type B用于非时隙型调度的物理共享信道,以时隙型调度的物理共享信道对应采用正常CP的物理共享信道为例,那么该非时隙型调度的物理共享信道的起始符号可以为时隙内第0-12符号上任意一个符号,且非时隙型调度的物理共享信道占用的符号数可为2、4或7个符号,该非时隙型调度的物理共享信道的DMRS可位于一个时隙的第一个符号上。Among them, the mapping method of type A is used for the physical shared channel of time-slot scheduling. Taking the physical shared channel of the slot-type scheduling corresponding to the normal (normal) cyclic prefix (cyclic prefix, CP) as an example, then the starting symbol of the physical shared channel of the slot-type scheduling is usually located in the first 4 symbols of a slot , and the number of symbols occupied by the physical shared channel of the slot-type scheduling can be 3-14 symbols, and the DMRS of the physical shared channel of the slot-type scheduling can be located on the second or third symbol of a time slot . Type B is used for the physical shared channel of non-slotted scheduling. Taking the physical shared channel of slotted scheduling corresponding to the physical shared channel of normal CP as an example, then the start symbol of the physical shared channel of non-slotted scheduling can be It is any symbol on the 0-12th symbol in the slot, and the number of symbols occupied by the physical shared channel of non-slot scheduling can be 2, 4 or 7 symbols. The DMRS of the physical shared channel of non-slot scheduling Can be located on the first symbol of a slot.
可选的,如果至少一个物理共享信道包括多个,那么多个物理共享信道中每个物理共享信道都有其对应的DMRS,多个物理共享信道中不同的物理共享信道的DMRS的时域位置可相同,也可不同。另外,至少一个物理共享信道中不同的物理共享信道的映射类型可相同。Optionally, if at least one physical shared channel includes multiple physical shared channels, each physical shared channel in the multiple physical shared channels has its corresponding DMRS, and the time domain positions of the DMRSs of different physical shared channels in the multiple physical shared channels Can be the same or different. In addition, the mapping types of different physical shared channels in at least one physical shared channel may be the same.
在一种可能的实现方式中,至少一个物理共享信道中的一个物理共享信道的时域资源信息可包括时隙偏移量、起始符号信息和符号数。例如,至少一个物理共享信道中的每个物理共享信道的时域资源信息均包括时隙偏移量、起始符号和符号数。In a possible implementation manner, the time-domain resource information of one physical shared channel in the at least one physical shared channel may include a time slot offset, start symbol information, and symbol number. For example, the time-domain resource information of each physical shared channel in at least one physical shared channel includes a time slot offset, a start symbol, and a number of symbols.
一个物理共享信道的时域资源信息包括的时隙偏移量,可指示该物理共享信道占用的时隙相对于用于调度至少一个物理共享信道的控制信息所占用的时隙之间的偏移量。一个物理共享信道的时域资源信息包括的起始符号信息,可指示该物理共享信道在所占用的时隙中的起始符号。一个物理共享信道的时域资源信息包括的符号数,可指示该物理共享信道占用一个时隙的符号的个数。The time slot offset included in the time domain resource information of a physical shared channel may indicate the time slot occupied by the physical shared channel relative to the time slot occupied by the control information used to schedule at least one physical shared channel. quantity. The start symbol information included in the time-domain resource information of a physical shared channel may indicate the start symbol of the occupied time slot of the physical shared channel. The number of symbols included in the time-domain resource information of a physical shared channel may indicate the number of symbols that the physical shared channel occupies in one time slot.
例如,以至少一个物理共享信道包括两个PDSCH为例,一种时域资源分配列表如下表1所示。For example, taking at least one physical shared channel including two PDSCHs as an example, a time domain resource allocation list is shown in Table 1 below.
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2022111677-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2022111677-appb-000001
在表1中,K 0表示PDSCH的时隙偏移量(两个PDSCH的时隙偏移量相同)。S 0表示两个PDSCH中的其中一个PDSCH(即PDSCH0)的起始符号信息,L 0表示该PDSCH0的符号数;S 1表示两个PDSCH中的另一个PDSCH(即PDSCH1)的起始符号信息,L 1表示该PDSCH1的符号数。 In Table 1, K 0 represents the time slot offset of the PDSCH (the time slot offsets of the two PDSCHs are the same). S 0 represents the start symbol information of one of the PDSCHs (that is, PDSCH0) among the two PDSCHs, L 0 represents the number of symbols of the PDSCH0; S 1 represents the start symbol information of the other PDSCH (that is, PDSCH1) among the two PDSCHs , L 1 represents the symbol number of the PDSCH1.
例如,以至少一个物理共享信道包括两个PDSCH为例,一种时域资源分配列表还可以如下表2所示。For example, taking at least one physical shared channel including two PDSCHs as an example, a time-domain resource allocation list may also be shown in Table 2 below.
表2Table 2
Figure PCTCN2022111677-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2022111677-appb-000002
与上述表1不同的是,上述表2中的行索引1至6中的每一个行索引均指示了PDSCH0和PDSCH1各自的时域资源信息,但行索引7和8中的每一个行索引仅指示了PDSCH0的时域资源信息,不包括PDSCH1的时域资源信息。Different from the above Table 1, each of the row indexes 1 to 6 in the above Table 2 indicates the respective time domain resource information of PDSCH0 and PDSCH1, but each row index of row indexes 7 and 8 only Indicates the time domain resource information of PDSCH0, but does not include the time domain resource information of PDSCH1.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,至少一个物理共享信道中的第一部分物理共享信道中每个物理共享信道的时域资源信息包括时隙偏移量、起始符号信息和符号数。至少一个物理共享信道中的第二部分物理共享信道中每个物理共享信道的时域资源信息包括时隙偏移量和符号数。关于时隙偏移量、起始符号信息和符号数的解释可参照前文。第一部分物理共享信道可包括一个或多个物理共享信道,第二部分物理共享信道也可包括一个或多个物理共享信道。第一部分物理共享信道和第二部分物理共享信道可以是至少一个物理共享信道中的全部物理共享信道,或者也可以是至少一个物理共享信道中的部分物理共享信道。In another possible implementation manner, the time-domain resource information of each physical shared channel in the first part of the at least one physical shared channel includes a time slot offset, start symbol information, and symbol number. The time-domain resource information of each physical shared channel in the second part of the at least one physical shared channel includes a time slot offset and a number of symbols. For the explanation of the time slot offset, start symbol information and number of symbols, please refer to the above. The first part of physical shared channels may include one or more physical shared channels, and the second part of physical shared channels may also include one or more physical shared channels. The first part of physical shared channels and the second part of physical shared channels may be all physical shared channels in at least one physical shared channel, or may be part of physical shared channels in at least one physical shared channel.
可选的,第二部分物理共享信道中的物理共享信道B的起始符号信息,可根据第一部分物理共享信道中的物理共享信道A的起始符号信息和符号数确定。例如,物理共享信道B的起始符号为物理共享信道A的结束符号的下一个符号。其中,物理共享信道A的结束符号可根据物理共享信道A的起始符号信息和符号数确定。Optionally, the start symbol information of the physical shared channel B in the second part of the physical shared channels may be determined according to the start symbol information and the number of symbols of the physical shared channel A in the first part of the physical shared channels. For example, the start symbol of physical shared channel B is the next symbol of the end symbol of physical shared channel A. Wherein, the ending symbol of the physical shared channel A may be determined according to the starting symbol information and the number of symbols of the physical shared channel A.
例如,第一部分物理共享信道包括PDSCH0,PDSCH0的起始符号为一个时隙中的第2个符号,占用的符号数为3。第二部分物理共享信道包括PDSCH1,PDSCH1的起始符号 可以是PDSCH0的结束符号的下一个符号,即为该时隙中的第5个符号。For example, the first part of the physical shared channel includes PDSCH0, the start symbol of PDSCH0 is the second symbol in a time slot, and the number of occupied symbols is 3. The second part of the physical shared channel includes PDSCH1, and the start symbol of PDSCH1 may be the next symbol of the end symbol of PDSCH0, that is, the fifth symbol in the time slot.
第二配置信息例如直接携带在RRC消息中,例如,第二配置信息为PDSCH时域资源分配列表信息元素(PDSCH-timedomainallocationlist information element)信息。具体例如,PDSCH-timedomainallocationlist information element信息中的PDSCH时域资源分配添加(PDSCH-ToAddTimeDomainResourceAlloaction-r18)信息配置该时域资源配置列表。具体例如,通过PDSCH-ToAddTimeDomainResourceAlloaction-r18中的起始和长度指示符(start and length indicator,SLIV)配置。或者例如,通过PDSCH-timedomainallocationlist information element配置至少一个物理共享信道中的第一部分物理共享信道的时域资源信息,以及通过PDSCH-ToAddTimeDomainResourceAlloaction-r18配置至少一个物理共享信道中的第二部分物理共享信道的时域资源信息。For example, the second configuration information is directly carried in the RRC message, for example, the second configuration information is PDSCH time domain resource allocation list information element (PDSCH-timedomainallocationlist information element) information. Specifically, for example, the PDSCH time domain resource allocation addition (PDSCH-ToAddTimeDomainResourceAlloaction-r18) information in the PDSCH-timedomainallocationlist information element information configures the time domain resource allocation list. Specifically, for example, through the start and length indicator (start and length indicator, SLIV) configuration in PDSCH-ToAddTimeDomainResourceAlloaction-r18. Or for example, configure the time domain resource information of the first part of the physical shared channel in at least one physical shared channel through the PDSCH-timedomainallocationlist information element, and configure the second part of the physical shared channel in the at least one physical shared channel through PDSCH-ToAddTimeDomainResourceAlloaction-r18 Time domain resource information.
需要说明的是,S602是以网络设备为终端设备配置时域资源分配列表为例,但实际上终端设备获得该时域资源分配列表的方式有多种。例如,终端设备可被预配置该时域资源分配列表,或者,该时域资源分配列表也可以是协议预定义的。It should be noted that S602 is an example in which the network device configures the time-domain resource allocation list for the terminal device, but actually there are multiple ways for the terminal device to obtain the time-domain resource allocation list. For example, the terminal device may be preconfigured with the time-domain resource allocation list, or the time-domain resource allocation list may also be predefined by a protocol.
作为一个示例,第一配置信息和第二配置信息可通过同一个消息发送,第一配置信息和第二配置信息也可通过不同的消息发送,并且这两个消息的类型可以是相同的,例如,第一配置信息和第二配置信息均通过RRC消息发送,或者这两个消息的类型是不同的,例如,第一配置信息通过RRC消息发送,第二配置信息通过介质访问控制(media access control,MAC)控制单元(control element,CE)消息发送,本申请实施例对此不做限定。As an example, the first configuration information and the second configuration information may be sent in the same message, and the first configuration information and the second configuration information may also be sent in different messages, and the types of the two messages may be the same, for example , both the first configuration information and the second configuration information are sent through RRC messages, or the types of the two messages are different, for example, the first configuration information is sent through RRC messages, and the second configuration information is sent through media access control (media access control) , MAC) control element (control element, CE) message sending, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
需要说明的是,网络设备可先执行S601,再执行S602,或者网络设备同时执行S601和S602,或者网络设备可先执行S602,再执行S601,本申请实施例对此不做限定。It should be noted that the network device may perform S601 first and then S602, or the network device may perform S601 and S602 at the same time, or the network device may perform S602 first and then S601, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
S603,网络设备向终端设备发送控制信息。相应的,终端设备从网络设备接收该控制信息。该控制信息用于调度包括M个第一物理共享信道的N个物理共享信道,在N等于M的情况下,控制信息中的第一字段承载第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示N个物理共享信道的调制与编码策略(modulation and coding scheme,MCS)。在N大于M的情况下,第一字段承载第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示K个第二物理共享信道的第一HARQ进程信息。S603. The network device sends control information to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the control information from the network device. The control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels including M first physical shared channels. When N is equal to M, the first field in the control information carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate N Modulation and coding scheme (MCS) of a physical shared channel. When N is greater than M, the first field carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate first HARQ process information of K second physical shared channels.
需要说明的是,N的取值小于或等于前文中的L的取值。It should be noted that the value of N is less than or equal to the value of L mentioned above.
示例性的,该控制信息例如为DCI。如果该控制信息用于调度下行数据,该控制信息可为DCI1_0,DCI1_1和DCI1_2。如果该控制信息用于调度上行数据,该控制信息可为DCI0_0、DCI0_1和DCI0_2。Exemplarily, the control information is, for example, DCI. If the control information is used to schedule downlink data, the control information may be DCI1_0, DCI1_1 and DCI1_2. If the control information is used to schedule uplink data, the control information may be DCI0_0, DCI0_1 and DCI0_2.
该控制信息包括第一字段。例如该控制信息为DCI,第一字段可以包括DCI中的MCS字段,或者也可以包括DCI中除了MCS字段之外的其他字段。或者,第一字段也可以是3GPP协议版本的DCI中新增的字段,本申请实施例不对此不做限制。The control information includes a first field. For example, the control information is DCI, and the first field may include the MCS field in the DCI, or may also include other fields in the DCI except the MCS field. Alternatively, the first field may also be a newly added field in the DCI of the 3GPP protocol version, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
该控制信息可调度N个物理共享信道的重传或新传。其中,N个物理共享信道包括M个第一物理共享信道,M为正整数。M的取值为预设值,M的取值可被预配置在网络设备中,或者是协议规定的。另外,M的取值还可被预配置在终端设备中。例如,该M的取值为1。The control information can schedule retransmission or new transmission of N physical shared channels. Wherein, the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels, and M is a positive integer. The value of M is a preset value, and the value of M may be pre-configured in the network device or specified by a protocol. In addition, the value of M may also be preconfigured in the terminal device. For example, the value of M is 1.
可选的,N个物理共享信道还可包括K个第二物理共享信道,K为正整数。需要说明的是,第一物理共享信道与第二物理共享信道属于同种类型的物理共享信道,例如,第一物理共享信道和第二物理共享信道均为PDSCH,或者,第一物理共享信道和第二物理共享 信道均为PUSCH。或者,第一物理共享信道和第二物理共享信道均为PSSCH。Optionally, the N physical shared channels may also include K second physical shared channels, where K is a positive integer. It should be noted that the first physical shared channel and the second physical shared channel belong to the same type of physical shared channel, for example, both the first physical shared channel and the second physical shared channel are PDSCH, or the first physical shared channel and Both the second physical shared channels are PUSCH. Alternatively, both the first physical shared channel and the second physical shared channel are PSSCHs.
当N与M的大小关系不同时,该第一字段所承载的指示信息也不同,下面分情况进行介绍。When the size relationship between N and M is different, the indication information carried by the first field is also different, and the following will introduce it according to the situation.
情况一,N等于M。 Case 1, N is equal to M.
如果N等于M,则第一字段可承载第一指示信息。该第一指示信息用于指示或包含N个物理共享信道的MCS。If N is equal to M, the first field may carry the first indication information. The first indication information is used to indicate or include the MCSs of the N physical shared channels.
如果M为1,那么该第一指示信息用于指示该物理共享信道的MCS。If M is 1, then the first indication information is used to indicate the MCS of the physical shared channel.
如果M大于1,那么该第一指示信息可分别指示N个物理共享信道中每个物理共享信道的MCS。在N个物理共享信道中的任意两个物理共享信道的MCS均相同的情况下,该第一指示信息可以只指示N个物理共享信道中的任意一个物理共享信道的MCS,如此可节省第一指示信息占用的比特数,或者,即使N个物理共享信道中的任意两个物理共享信道的MCS均相同,第一指示信息也可分别指示N个物理共享信道各自的MCS。If M is greater than 1, the first indication information may respectively indicate the MCS of each physical shared channel in the N physical shared channels. In the case that the MCSs of any two physical shared channels in the N physical shared channels are the same, the first indication information may only indicate the MCS of any one of the N physical shared channels, which saves the first The number of bits occupied by the indication information, or, even if the MCSs of any two physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels are the same, the first indication information may respectively indicate the respective MCSs of the N physical shared channels.
在一种可能的实施方式中,在N等于M的情况下,相当于N个物理共享信道即为M个第一物理共享信道,这时,该控制信息还可以包括第三HARQ进程号。该第三HARQ进程号用于确定N个物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号。In a possible implementation manner, when N is equal to M, the N physical shared channels are equivalent to M first physical shared channels. At this time, the control information may also include the third HARQ process number. The third HARQ process number is used to determine the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels.
如果M为1,那么该第三HARQ进程号可指示或包括该N个物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。If M is 1, the third HARQ process number may indicate or include the HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels.
如果M大于1,该第三HARQ进程号可指示或包含N个物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号,例如第三HARQ进程号通过显式方式指示N个物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号。或者,第三HARQ进程号可指示或包含N个物理共享信道中的第一部分物理共享信道的HARQ进程号,例如第一HARQ进程号通过显式方式指示N个物理共享信道中的第一部分物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。这种情况下,N个物理共享信道中的第二部分物理共享信道的HARQ进程号,可以根据第一部分物理共享信道的HARQ进程号以及第一规则确定。第一规则用于指示确定N个物理共享信道中的另一部分物理共享信道的HARQ进程号的策略,例如,第一规则为按照第一递增步进值,对第一部分物理共享信道的HARQ进程号中的最大进程号进行递增。第一规则可以是协议规定的,或者预配置在终端设备中的。第一递增步进值的取值可以是协议规定的,或者预配置在终端设备中的。If M is greater than 1, the third HARQ process number may indicate or include the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels, for example, the third HARQ process number indicates the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels in an explicit manner. Alternatively, the third HARQ process number may indicate or include the HARQ process number of the first part of the N physical shared channels, for example, the first HARQ process number explicitly indicates the first part of the N physical shared channels. The HARQ process ID of the channel. In this case, the HARQ process numbers of the second part of the physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels may be determined according to the HARQ process numbers of the first part of the physical shared channels and the first rule. The first rule is used to indicate the strategy for determining the HARQ process number of another part of the N physical shared channels. For example, the first rule is to determine the HARQ process number of the first part of the physical shared channel according to the first incremental step value Increment the maximum process number in . The first rule may be specified by the protocol, or pre-configured in the terminal device. The value of the first incremental step value may be specified by the protocol, or pre-configured in the terminal device.
例如,M的取值为3,第一递增步进值的取值为1,M个第一物理共享信道分别为物理共享信道A、物理共享信道B和物理共享信道C。物理共享信道A属于第一部分物理共享信道,物理共享信道A的HARQ进程号为1;物理共享信道B和物理共享信道C属于第二部分物理共享信道,第一递增步进值的取值为1。物理共享信道B和物理共享信道C的HARQ进程号是在物理共享信道A的HARQ进程号的基础上递增1得到的,例如物理共享信道B的HARQ进程号为2,物理共享信道B的HARQ进程号为3。For example, the value of M is 3, the value of the first incremental step is 1, and the M first physical shared channels are physical shared channel A, physical shared channel B, and physical shared channel C, respectively. The physical shared channel A belongs to the first part of the physical shared channel, and the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel A is 1; the physical shared channel B and the physical shared channel C belong to the second part of the physical shared channel, and the value of the first incremental step value is 1 . The HARQ process numbers of physical shared channel B and physical shared channel C are obtained by incrementing the HARQ process number of physical shared channel A by 1. For example, the HARQ process number of physical shared channel B is 2, and the HARQ process number of physical shared channel B The number is 3.
示例性的,无论M的取值等于1还是大于1,第三HARQ进程号可通过控制信息包括的第二字段承载。该第二字段与第一字段可以是同一个字段,例如二者均为MCS字段;或者,第二字段与第一字段也可以是不同的字段,例如,第一字段为MCS字段,第二字段为HARQ字段。Exemplarily, no matter the value of M is equal to 1 or greater than 1, the third HARQ process number may be carried by the second field included in the control information. The second field and the first field can be the same field, for example, both are MCS fields; or, the second field and the first field can also be different fields, for example, the first field is an MCS field, and the second field is the HARQ field.
在一种可能的实施方式中,控制信息还可包括第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示或包含N个物理共享信道的RV,该第三指示信息包括N个比特。In a possible implementation manner, the control information may further include third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate or include RVs of N physical shared channels, where the third indication information includes N bits.
具体的,如果N为1,则第三指示信息包括1个比特,该比特可指示该物理共享信道 的RV;如果N大于1,且N个物理共享信道不共享RV,则第三指示信息的N个比特可分别指示N个物理共享信道的RV,即一个比特用于指示一个物理共享信道的RV,或者,如果N大于1,且N个物理共享信道可共享RV,则第三指示信息的N个比特可指示任意一个物理共享信道的RV,其中N个比特的取值不同,则第三指示信息可分别指示一个物理共享信道的多个RV,这种情况下,由于N个物理共享信道是共享RV,因此相当于第三指示信息指示了N个物理共享信道中每个物理共享信道的RV。Specifically, if N is 1, the third indication information includes 1 bit, which can indicate the RV of the physical shared channel; if N is greater than 1, and N physical shared channels do not share the RV, then the third indication information N bits can respectively indicate the RV of N physical shared channels, that is, one bit is used to indicate the RV of one physical shared channel, or, if N is greater than 1, and N physical shared channels can share the RV, the third indication information N bits can indicate the RV of any physical shared channel, and the values of the N bits are different, and the third indication information can respectively indicate multiple RVs of a physical shared channel. In this case, since the N physical shared channels is a shared RV, so it is equivalent to that the third indication information indicates the RV of each physical shared channel in the N physical shared channels.
示例性的,第三指示信息的取值不同,则至少一个物理共享信道各自对应的RV可能也不同,网络设备和终端设备中可预配置有该第三指示信息的取值与至少一个物理共享信道各自的RV之间的第一对应关系。网络设备可根据当前需要调度的N个物理共享信道各自的RV,从该第一对应关系中确定第三指示信息的取值。相应的,终端设备接收该第三指示信息之后,也可根据第三指示信息的取值,从该第一对应关系中确定N个物理共享信道各自的RV。Exemplarily, if the value of the third indication information is different, the corresponding RVs of at least one physical shared channel may also be different. A first correspondence between the respective RVs of the channels. The network device may determine the value of the third indication information from the first correspondence according to the respective RVs of the N physical shared channels currently to be scheduled. Correspondingly, after receiving the third indication information, the terminal device may also determine the respective RVs of the N physical shared channels from the first correspondence according to the value of the third indication information.
例如,以N的取值是2,且N个物理共享信道共享RV为例,该第三指示信息中的2个比特所指示的RV可参考表3。For example, assuming that the value of N is 2 and N physical shared channels share the RV as an example, the RV indicated by the 2 bits in the third indication information may refer to Table 3.
表3table 3
2个比特的取值2 bit value RVRV
0000 00
0101 11
1010 22
1111 33
如上表3所示,如果网络设备确定2个物理共享信道对应的RV为3,则可确定第三指示信息的取值为11。相应的,终端设备接收控制信息之后,可根据第三指示信息的取值,从表2中确定2个物理共享信道的RV均为3。As shown in Table 3 above, if the network device determines that the RV corresponding to the two physical shared channels is 3, it may determine that the value of the third indication information is 11. Correspondingly, after receiving the control information, the terminal device may determine from Table 2 that the RVs of the two physical shared channels are both 3 according to the value of the third indication information.
情况二,N大于M。 Case 2, N is greater than M.
如果N大于M,相当于N个物理共享信道包括M个第一物理共享信道和K个第二物理共享信道,则第一字段可承载第二指示信息。该第二指示信息用于指示或包含K个第二物理共享信道的第一HARQ进程信息。第一HARQ进程信息用于确定K个第二物理共享信道中每个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。可选的,该控制信息还包括M个第一物理共享信道的第一HARQ进程号,第一HARQ进程号用于指示或包含M个第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。第一HARQ进程号指示的方式可参照前文关于第三HARQ进程号的内容。第一HARQ信息可通过控制信息包括的第二字段承载,第二字段的含义可参照前文。If N is greater than M, it means that the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels and K second physical shared channels, and the first field may carry the second indication information. The second indication information is used to indicate or include first HARQ process information of the K second physical shared channels. The first HARQ process information is used to determine the HARQ process number of each second physical shared channel in the K second physical shared channels. Optionally, the control information further includes first HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels, and the first HARQ process numbers are used to indicate or include the HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels. For the manner indicated by the first HARQ process number, refer to the foregoing content about the third HARQ process number. The first HARQ information may be carried by the second field included in the control information, and the meaning of the second field may refer to the foregoing.
第一HARQ进程信息可包括第二HARQ进程号或第二HARQ进程号的偏移量,下面分别对第二HARQ进程号和第二HARQ进程号的偏移量进行介绍。The first HARQ process information may include the second HARQ process number or the offset of the second HARQ process number, and the second HARQ process number and the offset of the second HARQ process number will be introduced respectively below.
1、第二HARQ进程号。1. The second HARQ process number.
第一HARQ进程信息包括的第二HARQ进程号,可用于指示或包含K个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。The second HARQ process numbers included in the first HARQ process information may be used to indicate or include the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels.
如果K为1,那么该第二HARQ进程号可指示或包含该第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。If K is 1, the second HARQ process number may indicate or include the HARQ process number of the second physical shared channel.
如果K大于1,那么该第二HARQ进程号可指示或包含K个第二物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号,例如该第二HARQ进程号通过显式方式指示K个第二物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号。或者,该第二HARQ进程号可指示或包含K个第二物理共享信道中的第三部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。K个第二物理共享信道中的第四部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号可根据第三部分第二物理共享信道中的任意一个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号确定。第三部分第二物理共享信道可包括一个或多个第二物理共享信道,第四部分物理共享信道也可包括一个或多个第二物理共享信道。第三部分第二物理共享信道和第四部分第二物理共享信道可以是K个第二物理共享信道中的全部物理共享信道,或者也可以是K第二个物理共享信道中的部分第二物理共享信道。If K is greater than 1, then the second HARQ process number may indicate or include the respective HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels, for example, the second HARQ process number explicitly indicates the respective HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels HARQ process ID. Alternatively, the second HARQ process number may indicate or include the HARQ process numbers of the third part of the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels. The HARQ process numbers of the fourth part of the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels may be determined according to the HARQ process numbers of any second physical shared channels in the third part of the second physical shared channels. The third part of the second physical shared channels may include one or more second physical shared channels, and the fourth part of the physical shared channels may also include one or more second physical shared channels. The third part of the second physical shared channel and the fourth part of the second physical shared channel may be all the physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels, or may be part of the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels. shared channel.
例如,K个第二物理共享信道中的第四部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号,可根据第三部分第二物理共享信道以及第二规则确定。其中,第二规则例如为,按照第二递增步进值,对第三部分第二物理共享信道中对应的最大HARQ进程号进行递增。第二规则和第一规则可以是相同的,也可不同。第二规则的含义可参照第一规则的含义。第二递增步进值和第一递增步进值的取值可以相同,也可以不同。第二递增步进值的设置方式可参照前文。For example, the HARQ process numbers of the fourth part of the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels may be determined according to the third part of the second physical shared channels and the second rule. Wherein, the second rule is, for example, to increment the corresponding maximum HARQ process number in the third part of the second physical shared channel according to the second increment step value. The second rule and the first rule may be the same or different. The meaning of the second rule can refer to the meaning of the first rule. The values of the second incremental step value and the first incremental step value may be the same or different. For the setting method of the second incremental step value, please refer to the above.
2、第二HARQ进程号的偏移量。2. The offset of the second HARQ process number.
第一HARQ进程信息包括的第二HARQ进程号的偏移量,可指示或包含该K个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号相对于第一HARQ进程号的偏移量。The offset of the second HARQ process number included in the first HARQ process information may indicate or include the offset of the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process number.
(1),如果K为1,该第二HARQ进程号的偏移量指示或包括该第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号相对于第一HARQ进程号的偏移量。(1) If K is 1, the offset of the second HARQ process number indicates or includes the offset of the HARQ process number of the second physical shared channel relative to the first HARQ process number.
如果第一HARQ进程号包括多个HARQ进程号,则该第二HARQ进程号的偏移量可指示或包含一个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号相对于目标第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号的偏移量。目标第一物理共享信道例如为多个第一物理共享信道中满足第一条件的第一物理共享信道,第一条件例如为目标第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号是多个第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号中取值最大的HARQ进程号,或者,第一条件例如为目标第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号是多个第一物理共享信道的中取值最小的HARQ进程号等。If the first HARQ process number includes multiple HARQ process numbers, the offset of the second HARQ process number may indicate or include the HARQ process number of a second physical shared channel relative to the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel offset. The target first physical shared channel is, for example, the first physical shared channel that satisfies the first condition among the multiple first physical shared channels, and the first condition is, for example, that the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel is that the multiple first physical shared channels The HARQ process number with the largest value among the HARQ process numbers, or the first condition is, for example, that the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel is the HARQ process number with the smallest value among multiple first physical shared channels.
例如,M个第一物理共享信道包括物理共享信道A和物理共享信道B,物理共享信道A对应的HARQ进程号为3,物理共享信道B对应的HARQ进程号为4,K个第二物理共享信道包括物理共享信道C,目标第一物理共享信道为物理共享信道B,第二HARQ进程号的偏移量包括物理共享信道C的HARQ进程号相对于目标第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号的偏移量为3,因此终端设备可根据该第二HARQ进程号的偏移量,确定物理共享信道C的HARQ进程号为7。For example, M first physical shared channels include physical shared channel A and physical shared channel B, the HARQ process number corresponding to physical shared channel A is 3, the HARQ process number corresponding to physical shared channel B is 4, and the K second physical shared channels The channel includes a physical shared channel C, the target first physical shared channel is a physical shared channel B, and the offset of the second HARQ process number includes the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel C relative to the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel The offset is 3, so the terminal device can determine that the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel C is 7 according to the offset of the second HARQ process number.
(2),如果K大于1,该HARQ进程号的偏移量可指示或包含K个第二物理共享信道中的第五部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号中的每个HARQ进程号相对于第一HARQ进程号的偏移量。或者,该第二HARQ进程号的偏移量包括K个第二物理共享信道中的全部第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号HARQ进程号相对于第一HARQ进程号的偏移量。下面对HARQ进程号的偏移量的如上两种情况分别进行介绍。其中,第五部分第二物理共享信道可包括一个或多个第二物理共享信道,第五部分第二物理共享信道是K个第二物理共享信道中的部分物理共享信道。第五部分第二物理共享信道与前文中的第三部 分第二物理共享信道可完全相同,也不完全相同。不完全相同可理解第五部分包括的第二物理共享信道至少存在一个与第三部分第二物理共享信道所包括的第二物理共享信道不同。(2), if K is greater than 1, the offset of the HARQ process number may indicate or include the relative value of each HARQ process number in the HARQ process numbers of the fifth part of the second physical shared channel in the K second physical shared channels Offset from the first HARQ process number. Alternatively, the offset of the second HARQ process number includes the offset of the HARQ process numbers of all the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process number. The above two cases of the offset of the HARQ process number are respectively introduced below. Wherein, the fifth part of the second physical shared channels may include one or more second physical shared channels, and the fifth part of the second physical shared channels is a part of the K second physical shared channels. The fifth part of the second physical shared channel may or may not be completely the same as the third part of the aforementioned second physical shared channel. Not exactly the same. It can be understood that at least one of the second physical shared channels included in the fifth part is different from the second physical shared channels included in the second physical shared channel in the third part.
情况1,该第二HARQ进程号的偏移量指示或包括K个第二物理共享信道中的第五部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号分别相对于第一HARQ进程号的偏移量。In case 1, the offset of the second HARQ process ID indicates or includes offsets of the HARQ process IDs of the fifth part of the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process ID.
如果该第一HARQ进程号仅包括一个第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号,那么该第二HARQ进程号的偏移量指示或包括K个第二物理共享信道中的第五部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号分别相对于该第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号的偏移量。If the first HARQ process number only includes the HARQ process number of one first physical shared channel, then the offset of the second HARQ process number indicates or includes the fifth part of the second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels The offsets of the HARQ process numbers of the channels relative to the HARQ process numbers of the first physical shared channel.
例如,第一HARQ进程号包括物理共享信道A的HARQ进程号为2,K个第二物理共享信道包括物理共享信道B、物理共享信道C和物理共享信道D,第五部分第二物理共享信道包括物理共享信道B和物理共享信道C,且第二HARQ进程号的偏移量分别为2和3。终端设备接收该控制信息之后,可根据第一HARQ进程号和该第二HARQ进程号的偏移量,从而确定物理共享信道B的HARQ进程号为4,物理共享信道C的HARQ进程号为5。For example, the HARQ process number of the first HARQ process number including the physical shared channel A is 2, the K second physical shared channels include the physical shared channel B, the physical shared channel C and the physical shared channel D, and the fifth part of the second physical shared channel The physical shared channel B and the physical shared channel C are included, and the offsets of the second HARQ process numbers are 2 and 3 respectively. After receiving the control information, the terminal device can determine the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel B as 4 and the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel C as 5 according to the offset between the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number .
如果第一HARQ进程号指示或包含多个第一物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号,那么该HARQ进程号的偏移量可指示或包含K个第二物理共享信道中的第五部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号分别相对于多个第一物理共享信道中的目标第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号的偏移量。目标第一物理共享信道的含义可参照前文。If the first HARQ process number indicates or includes the respective HARQ process numbers of a plurality of first physical shared channels, then the offset of the HARQ process number may indicate or include the fifth part of the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels. Offsets of the HARQ process numbers of the shared channel relative to the HARQ process numbers of the target first physical shared channel among the multiple first physical shared channels. For the meaning of the target first physical shared channel, refer to the foregoing.
示例性的,K个第二物理共享信道中的第六部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号,可根据第五部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号以及第三规则确定,第三规则例如,根据第三递增步进值,对第五部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号中的最大进程号进行递增。第三规则的内容可参照前文的第一规则的内容,第三递增步进值的内容可参照前文第一递增步进值的内容。其中,第六部分物理共享信道也可包括一个或多个第二物理共享信道。第五部分第二物理共享信道和第六部分第二物理共享信道可以是K个第二物理共享信道中的全部物理共享信道,或者也可以是K第二个物理共享信道中的部分第二物理共享信道。第六部分第二物理共享信道与前文的第四部分第二物理共享信道可相同,也可不完全相同。不完全相同的含义可参照前文。Exemplarily, the HARQ process number of the sixth part of the second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels can be determined according to the HARQ process number of the fifth part of the second physical shared channel and the third rule. The third rule is, for example, , according to the third increment step value, increment the maximum process number among the HARQ process numbers of the fifth part of the second physical shared channel. The content of the third rule may refer to the content of the first rule above, and the content of the third incremental step value may refer to the content of the first incremental step value above. Wherein, the sixth part of physical shared channels may also include one or more second physical shared channels. The fifth part of the second physical shared channel and the sixth part of the second physical shared channel may be all the physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels, or may be part of the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels. shared channel. The sixth part of the second physical shared channel may or may not be completely the same as the foregoing fourth part of the second physical shared channel. For meanings that are not exactly the same, please refer to the previous text.
例如,第一HARQ进程号包括物理共享信道A的HARQ进程号为2和物理共享信道B的HARQ进程号为3,K个第二物理共享信道中的第五部分第二物理共享信道包括物理共享信道C和物理共享信道D,且第二HARQ进程号的偏移量包括物理共享信道C相对于目标第一物理共享信道(例如为物理共享信道A)的HARQ进程号的偏移量为4。第三规则为按照第三递增步进值(取值例如为1),对第五部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号中的最大进程号进行递增。终端设备接收该控制信息之后,可根据第一HARQ进程号和该第二HARQ进程号的偏移量,从而确定物理共享信道C的HARQ进程号为6,终端设备对物理共享信道C的HARQ进程号进行递增,从而确定物理共享信道D的HARQ进程号为7。For example, the first HARQ process number includes the HARQ process number 2 of the physical shared channel A and the HARQ process number 3 of the physical shared channel B, and the fifth part of the second physical shared channel in the K second physical shared channels includes the physical shared channel channel C and physical shared channel D, and the offset of the second HARQ process number includes an offset of 4 between the physical shared channel C and the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel (for example, physical shared channel A). The third rule is to increment the maximum process number among the HARQ process numbers of the fifth part of the second physical shared channel according to the third increment step value (for example, 1). After receiving the control information, the terminal device can determine the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel C as 6 according to the offset between the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number, and the terminal device can determine the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel C The number is incremented, so that the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel D is determined to be 7.
情况2,该HARQ进程号的偏移量指示或包含K个第二物理共享信道中的全部第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号分别相对于第一HARQ进程号的偏移量。In case 2, the offset of the HARQ process number indicates or includes the offsets of the HARQ process numbers of all the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process number.
如果该第一HARQ进程号仅指示或包含一个第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号,那么该HARQ进程号的偏移量可指示或包含K个第二物理共享信道中的全部第二物理共享 信道的HARQ进程号分别相对于该第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号的偏移量。If the first HARQ process number only indicates or includes the HARQ process number of a first physical shared channel, then the offset of the HARQ process number may indicate or include all the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels The HARQ process IDs of the HARQ process IDs are respectively relative to the offsets of the HARQ process IDs of the first physical shared channel.
例如,第一HARQ进程号包括物理共享信道A的HARQ进程号为2,K个第二物理共享信道包括物理共享信道B和物理共享信道C,且第二HARQ进程号的偏移量分别为2和3。终端设备接收该控制信息之后,可根据第一HARQ进程号和该第二HARQ进程号的偏移量,从而确定物理共享信道B的HARQ进程号为4,物理共享信道C的HARQ进程号为5。For example, the HARQ process number of the first HARQ process number including the physical shared channel A is 2, the K second physical shared channels include the physical shared channel B and the physical shared channel C, and the offsets of the second HARQ process numbers are respectively 2 and 3. After receiving the control information, the terminal device can determine the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel B as 4 and the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel C as 5 according to the offset between the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number .
如果第一HARQ进程号指示或包括多个第一物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号,那么该HARQ进程号的偏移量指示或包括K个第二物理共享信道中的全部第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号分别相对于多个第一物理共享信道中的目标第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号的偏移量。目标第一物理共享信道的含义可参照前文。If the first HARQ process number indicates or includes the respective HARQ process numbers of multiple first physical shared channels, then the offset of the HARQ process number indicates or includes all the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels Offsets of the HARQ process numbers relative to the HARQ process numbers of the target first physical shared channel among the multiple first physical shared channels. For the meaning of the target first physical shared channel, refer to the foregoing.
例如,第一HARQ进程号包括物理共享信道A的HARQ进程号为2和物理共享信道B的HARQ进程号为3,K个第二物理共享信道包括物理共享信道C和物理共享信道D,且第二HARQ进程号的偏移量分别为4和5,目标第一物理共享信道为物理共享信道B。终端设备接收该控制信息之后,可根据第一HARQ进程号和该第二HARQ进程号的偏移量,从而确定物理共享信道C的HARQ进程号为7,物理共享信道D的HARQ进程号为8。For example, the first HARQ process number includes the HARQ process number 2 of the physical shared channel A and the HARQ process number 3 of the physical shared channel B, the K second physical shared channels include the physical shared channel C and the physical shared channel D, and the first The offsets of the two HARQ process numbers are 4 and 5 respectively, and the target first physical shared channel is the physical shared channel B. After receiving the control information, the terminal device can determine the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel C as 7 and the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel D as 8 according to the offset between the first HARQ process number and the second HARQ process number .
在一种可能的实施方式中,在N大于M的情况下,第一字段还可承载如下1至3中的一种或多种。In a possible implementation manner, when N is greater than M, the first field may further carry one or more of the following 1 to 3.
1、K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的新数据指示符(new data indicator,NDI)。其中一个第二物理共享信道的NDI用于指示该第二物理共享信道用于新传或重传。1. A new data indicator (new data indicator, NDI) of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels. The NDI of one of the second physical shared channels is used to indicate that the second physical shared channel is used for new transmission or retransmission.
如果K大于1,那么第一字段可承载K个第二物理共享信道中的第七部分第二物理共享信道中每个第二物理共享信道的NDI,K个第二物理共享中的第八部分第二物理共享信道的NDI可与第七部分第二物理共享信道中任意一个第二物理共享信道的NDI相同。其中,第七部分第二物理共享信道可包括一个或多个第二物理共享信道,第八部分物理共享信道也可包括一个或多个第二物理共享信道。第七部分第二物理共享信道和第四部分第二物理共享信道可以是K个第二物理共享信道中的全部物理共享信道,或者也可以是K第二个物理共享信道中的部分第二物理共享信道。第七部分第二物理共享信道与前文的第三部分第二物理共享信道可相同,也可不完全相同,第八部分第二物理共享信道与前文的第四部分第二物理共享信道可相同,也可不完全相同。If K is greater than 1, then the first field may carry the NDI of each second physical shared channel in the seventh part of the K second physical shared channels, the eighth part of the K second physical shared channels The NDI of the second physical shared channel may be the same as the NDI of any second physical shared channel in the seventh part of the second physical shared channel. Wherein, the seventh part of second physical shared channels may include one or more second physical shared channels, and the eighth part of physical shared channels may also include one or more second physical shared channels. The seventh part of the second physical shared channel and the fourth part of the second physical shared channel may be all the physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels, or may be part of the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels. shared channel. The second physical shared channel in the seventh part may be the same as the second physical shared channel in the third part above, or may not be completely the same, and the second physical shared channel in the eighth part may be the same as the second physical shared channel in the fourth part above, or Not exactly the same.
可选的,控制信息还可包括M个第一物理共享信道中的至少一个第一物理共享信道的NDI,该至少一个第一物理共享信道的NDI可承载在控制信息包括的第三字段中。第三字段与第一字段可以是同一字段,第三字段与第一字段也可以是不同的字段。例如,第一字段为MCS字段,第三字段为NDI字段。Optionally, the control information may further include the NDI of at least one first physical shared channel among the M first physical shared channels, and the NDI of the at least one first physical shared channel may be carried in the third field included in the control information. The third field and the first field may be the same field, or the third field and the first field may be different fields. For example, the first field is the MCS field, and the third field is the NDI field.
可选的,N个物理共享信道的NDI均相同,这种情况下,该第一字段可无需承载K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的NDI,这种情况下,第三字段仍需承载至少一个第一物理共享信道的NDI。Optionally, the NDIs of the N physical shared channels are all the same. In this case, the first field may not need to carry the NDI of at least one of the K second physical shared channels. In this case, The third field still needs to carry at least one NDI of the first physical shared channel.
2、N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量。2. The offset of the MCS index of the N physical shared channels.
如果N个物理共享信道的MCS均相同,则该N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量可仅指示或包括一个MCS索引的偏移量进行表示。这一个MCS索引的偏移量可理解为 任意一个物理共享信道所承载的传输单元所采用的MCS索引与上一次传输该传输单元采用的MCS索引之间的偏移量。If the MCSs of the N physical shared channels are all the same, the offsets of the MCS indexes of the N physical shared channels may only indicate or include one MCS index offset. The offset of the MCS index can be understood as the offset between the MCS index used by the transmission unit carried by any physical shared channel and the MCS index used in the last transmission of the transmission unit.
如果N个物理共享信道的MCS不完全相同,即至少存在两个物理共享信道的MCS不同,则MCS索引的偏移量可指示或包含N个MCS索引的偏移量。其中一个MCS索引的偏移量是指N个物理共享信道上中的一个物理共享信道所承载的传输单元采用的MCS索引与上一次传输该传输单元采用的MCS索引之间的偏移量。If the MCSs of the N physical shared channels are not completely the same, that is, the MCSs of at least two physical shared channels are different, the offset of the MCS index may indicate or include the offset of the N MCS indices. The offset of one MCS index refers to the offset between the MCS index used by the transmission unit carried by one of the N physical shared channels and the MCS index used for the last transmission of the transmission unit.
以传输单元为TB0为例,如果控制信息用于调度在一个物理共享信道上重传TB0,那么上一次传输是指上一次传输该TB0。例如,如果控制信息调度在一个物理共享信道上第一次重传TB0,那么上一次传输可为TB0的新传。如果控制信息调度在一个物理共享信道上第二次重传TB0,那么上一次传输可为TB0的第一次重传。Taking the transmission unit as TB0 as an example, if the control information is used to schedule retransmission of TB0 on a physical shared channel, then the last transmission refers to the last transmission of the TB0. For example, if the control information schedules retransmission of TBO for the first time on a physical shared channel, then the last transmission may be a new transmission of TBO. If the control information schedules the second retransmission of TBO on a physical shared channel, then the last transmission may be the first retransmission of TBO.
作为一个示例,N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元的上一次传输所采用的MCS均相同。这样,在上一次传输过程中,即使终端设备无法正确获得某个物理共享信道所承载的传输单元的上一次传输所采用的MCS,也可根据其他物理共享信道所承载的传输单元的上一次传输所采用的MCS,对某个物理共享信道进行解调。As an example, the last transmission of the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels uses the same MCS. In this way, during the last transmission, even if the terminal device cannot correctly obtain the MCS used for the last transmission of the transmission unit carried by a certain physical shared channel, it can The adopted MCS demodulates a certain physical shared channel.
3、K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的CBGFI。3. The CBGFI of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels.
其中一个第二物理共享信道的CBGFI用于指示在该第二物理共享信道上承载的传输单元是否与上一次传输的传输单元进行软合并。软合并的含义和方式可参照前文。The CBGFI of one of the second physical shared channels is used to indicate whether the transmission unit carried on the second physical shared channel is soft-combined with the transmission unit transmitted last time. The meaning and method of soft merger can be referred to above.
例如,通信系统采用基于CBG的传输方案,那么该第一字段还可承载上述K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的CBGFI。可选的,网络设备还可通过第五配置信息为终端设备配置是否开启CBGFI字段。如果终端设备开启了CBGFI字段,那么该控制信息中的CBGFI可承载M个第一物理共享信道中的至少一个第一物理共享信道的CBGFI。For example, if the communication system adopts a CBG-based transmission scheme, then the first field may also carry CBGFI of at least one second physical shared channel among the aforementioned K second physical shared channels. Optionally, the network device may also configure whether to enable the CBGFI field for the terminal device through the fifth configuration information. If the terminal device enables the CBGFI field, the CBGFI in the control information may carry the CBGFI of at least one first physical shared channel among the M first physical shared channels.
例如,网络设备可通过RRC消息的PDSCH码块组传输(PDSCH-CodeBlockGroupTransmission)信令中的码块组刷新指示(codeBlockGroupFlushIndicator)信令指示终端设备是否开启CBGFI字段。例如,CBGFI信令的取值为1,则指示终端设备开启CBGFI字段。For example, the network device may indicate to the terminal device whether to enable the CBGFI field through the code block group flush indication (codeBlockGroupFlushIndicator) signaling in the PDSCH-CodeBlockGroupTransmission signaling of the RRC message. For example, the value of the CBGFI signaling is 1, which instructs the terminal device to enable the CBGFI field.
具体来说,如果K大于1,该第一字段可承载K个第二物理共享信道中第九部分第二物理共享信道的CBGFI。可选的,K个第二物理共享信道中的第十部分第二物理共享信道的CBGFI可与第九部分第二物理共享信道的CBGFI相同。或者,该第一字段可承载K个第二物理共享信道各自的CBGFI。第十部分第二物理共享信道和第九部分第二物理共享信道可以是K个第二物理共享信道中的部分第二物理共享信道,也可以是K个第二物理共享信道中的全部第二物理共享信道。第九部分第二物理共享信道和前文中的第三物理共享信道可相同,也可不完全相同。第十部分第二物理共享信道和前文中的第四物理共享信道可相同,也可不完全相同。Specifically, if K is greater than 1, the first field may carry the CBGFI of the ninth part of the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels. Optionally, the CBGFI of the tenth part of the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels may be the same as the CBGFI of the ninth part of the second physical shared channels. Alternatively, the first field may carry the CBGFIs of the K second physical shared channels. The tenth part of the second physical shared channel and the ninth part of the second physical shared channel may be part of the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels, or may be all the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels. Physical shared channel. The second physical shared channel in the ninth part may be the same as or not completely the same as the third physical shared channel mentioned above. The second physical shared channel in the tenth part may be the same as or not completely the same as the fourth physical shared channel mentioned above.
如果N大于M,且第一字段没有承载N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量,换言之,第一字段没有承载N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量,可选的,该N个物理共享信道上分别所承载的传输单元所采用的MCS均相同,且与该N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元的上一次传输所采用的MCS相同。因此,网络设备在调度重传时,无需单独指示N个物理共享信道的MCS,终端设备可根据上一次传输N个物理共享信道所承载的传输单元所采用的MCS对本次调度的N个物理共享信道进行解调。若终端设备漏检 该N个物理共享信道前一次传输时的任意一个控制信息,网络设备也可以确定对应的物理共享信道所采用的MCS。If N is greater than M, and the first field does not carry the offsets of the MCS indexes of the N physical shared channels, in other words, the first field does not carry the offsets of the MCS indexes of the N physical shared channels, optionally, the N The MCSs adopted by the transmission units carried on the physical shared channels respectively are the same, and are the same as the MCSs adopted by the last transmission of the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels respectively. Therefore, when scheduling retransmissions, the network device does not need to indicate the MCS of the N physical shared channels separately, and the terminal device can use the MCS adopted by the transmission unit carried by the N physical shared channels for the last transmission Shared channel for demodulation. If the terminal device misses any piece of control information in the previous transmission of the N physical shared channels, the network device may also determine the MCS adopted by the corresponding physical shared channels.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,如果通信系统采用的是非CBG的传输方案(非CBG的传输方案中,传输单元不是CBG,传输单元例如可为TB或CB等),则该第一字段可承载K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的NDI和/或N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量。In another possible implementation, if the communication system adopts a non-CBG transmission scheme (in a non-CBG transmission scheme, the transmission unit is not CBG, and the transmission unit may be, for example, TB or CB, etc.), the first field may be Carrying the NDI of at least one second physical shared channel in the K second physical shared channels and/or the offset of the MCS index of the N physical shared channels.
下面以下行场景下,控制信息为DCI,第一字段为MCS字段,MCS字段包括5比特,M个第一物理共享信道包括PDSCH0,K个第二物理共享信道包括PDSCH1为例,对该MCS字段进行介绍。该MCS字段可具体为如下(a)至(d)中的任意一种。在该实施例中,DCI包含HARQ字段,该HARQ字段用于指示PDSCH0的HARQ进程号。In the following downlink scenario, the control information is DCI, the first field is the MCS field, the MCS field includes 5 bits, M first physical shared channels include PDSCH0, and K second physical shared channels include PDSCH1 as an example, the MCS field Make an introduction. The MCS field may specifically be any one of the following (a) to (d). In this embodiment, the DCI includes a HARQ field, and the HARQ field is used to indicate the HARQ process number of PDSCH0.
(a)、MCS字段中的1比特用于指示PDSCH1的NDI,MCS字段中的剩余4比特用于PDSCH1的HARQ进程号(第二指示信息的一种示例)。(a), 1 bit in the MCS field is used to indicate the NDI of PDSCH1, and the remaining 4 bits in the MCS field are used for the HARQ process number of PDSCH1 (an example of the second indication information).
(b)、MCS字段中的1比特用于指示PDSCH1的NDI,MCS字段中的2比特用于PDSCH1的HARQ进程号相对于PDSCH0的HARQ进程号的偏移量(第二指示信息的一种示例),MCS字段中的2比特用于指示PDSCH1所承载的传输单元的MCS索引与上一次传输该传输单元的MCS索引之间的偏移量和/或PDSCH0所承载的传输单元的MCS索引与上一次传输该传输单元的MCS索引之间的偏移量。(b), 1 bit in the MCS field is used to indicate the NDI of PDSCH1, and 2 bits in the MCS field are used for the offset of the HARQ process number of PDSCH1 relative to the HARQ process number of PDSCH0 (an example of the second indication information ), the 2 bits in the MCS field are used to indicate the offset between the MCS index of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH1 and the MCS index of the previous transmission of the transmission unit and/or the difference between the MCS index of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH0 and the previous The offset between the MCS indices of this transport unit at a time.
如果PDSCH1所承载的传输单元的MCS与PDSCH0所承载的传输单元的MCS相同,那么MCS字段中的2比特可直接指示PDSCH1所承载的传输单元的MCS索引与上一次传输该传输单元的MCS索引之间的偏移量,或者PDSCH0所承载的传输单元的MCS索引与上一次传输该传输单元的MCS索引之间的偏移量即可。如果PDSCH1所承载的传输单元的MCS与PDSCH0所承载的传输单元的MCS不同,那么MCS字段中的2比特可指示PDSCH0所承载的传输单元的MCS索引与上一次传输该传输单元的MCS索引之间的偏移量,或者PDSCH1所承载的传输单元的MCS索引与PDSCH0上一次传输该传输单元的MCS索引之间的偏移量。If the MCS of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH1 is the same as the MCS of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH0, then the 2 bits in the MCS field can directly indicate the difference between the MCS index of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH1 and the MCS index of the transmission unit last transmitted. or the offset between the MCS index of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH0 and the MCS index of the last transmission of the transmission unit. If the MCS of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH1 is different from the MCS of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH0, the 2 bits in the MCS field can indicate the difference between the MCS index of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH0 and the MCS index of the last transmission of the transmission unit or the offset between the MCS index of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH1 and the MCS index of the transmission unit last transmitted by PDSCH0.
(c)、MCS字段中的2比特用于指示PDSCH1的HARQ进程号相对于PDSCH0的HARQ进程号的偏移量(第二指示信息的一种示例),MCS字段中的3比特用于指示PDSCH1所承载的传输单元的MCS索引与上一次传输该传输单元的MCS索引之间的偏移量和/或PDSCH0所承载的传输单元的MCS索引与上一次传输该传输单元的MCS索引之间的偏移量。(c), 2 bits in the MCS field are used to indicate the offset of the HARQ process number of PDSCH1 relative to the HARQ process number of PDSCH0 (an example of the second indication information), and 3 bits in the MCS field are used to indicate PDSCH1 The offset between the MCS index of the carried transmission unit and the MCS index of the last transmission of the transmission unit and/or the offset between the MCS index of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH0 and the MCS index of the last transmission of the transmission unit displacement.
(d)、MCS字段中的3比特用于PDSCH1的HARQ进程号相对于PDSCH0的HARQ进程号的偏移量(第二指示信息的一种示例),MCS字段中的2比特用于指示PDSCH1所承载的传输单元的MCS索引与上一次传输该传输单元的MCS索引之间的偏移量和/或PDSCH0所承载的传输单元的MCS索引与上一次传输该传输单元的MCS索引之间的偏移量。(d), 3 bits in the MCS field are used for the offset of the HARQ process number of PDSCH1 relative to the HARQ process number of PDSCH0 (an example of the second indication information), and 2 bits in the MCS field are used to indicate the HARQ process number of PDSCH1 The offset between the MCS index of the carried transmission unit and the MCS index of the last transmission of the transmission unit and/or the offset between the MCS index of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH0 and the MCS index of the last transmission of the transmission unit quantity.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,如果通信系统支持基于CBG的传输方案,那么通信系统是以CBG作为传输单元进行传输,那么该第一字段也可承载K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的CBGFI。这种情况下,第一字段可承载上述K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的NDI、N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量和K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的CBGFI中的一种或多种。In another possible implementation, if the communication system supports a CBG-based transmission scheme, then the communication system uses CBG as the transmission unit for transmission, then the first field may also carry at least CBGFI of a second physical shared channel. In this case, the first field may carry the NDI of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels, the offset of the MCS index of the N physical shared channels, and the K second physical shared channel One or more of the CBGFIs of the at least one second physical shared channel.
下面以第一字段为MCS字段,MCS字段包括5比特,M个第一物理共享信道包括PDSCH0,K个第二物理共享信道包括PDSCH1为例,对该MCS字段进行示例介绍。该MCS字段可具体为如下(e)至(g)中的任意一种。Taking the first field as the MCS field, the MCS field including 5 bits, the M first physical shared channels including PDSCH0, and the K second physical shared channels including PDSCH1 as an example, the MCS field will be introduced as an example. The MCS field may specifically be any one of the following (e) to (g).
(e)、MCS字段中的1比特用于指示PDSCH1的NDI,MCS字段中的4比特用于指示PDSCH1的HARQ进程号(第二指示信息的一种示例)。(e) 1 bit in the MCS field is used to indicate the NDI of PDSCH1, and 4 bits in the MCS field are used to indicate the HARQ process number of PDSCH1 (an example of the second indication information).
(f)、MCS字段中的1比特用于指示PDSCH1的NDI,MCS字段中的1比特用于指示PDSCH1的CBGFI,MCS字段中的3比特用于指示PDSCH1的HARQ进程号相对于PDSCH0的HARQ进程号的偏移量(第二指示信息的一种示例)。(f), 1 bit in the MCS field is used to indicate the NDI of PDSCH1, 1 bit in the MCS field is used to indicate the CBGFI of PDSCH1, and 3 bits in the MCS field are used to indicate that the HARQ process number of PDSCH1 is relative to the HARQ process of PDSCH0 The offset of the number (an example of the second indication information).
(g)、MCS字段中的1比特用于指示PDSCH1的NDI,MCS字段中的1比特用于指示PDSCH1所承载的传输单元的MCS索引与上一次传输该传输单元的MCS索引之间的偏移量,MCS字段中的3比特用于指示PDSCH1的HARQ进程号相对于第一HARQ进程号中的一个HARQ进程号的偏移量(第二指示信息的一种)。(g), 1 bit in the MCS field is used to indicate the NDI of PDSCH1, and 1 bit in the MCS field is used to indicate the offset between the MCS index of the transmission unit carried by PDSCH1 and the MCS index of the last transmission of the transmission unit The 3 bits in the MCS field are used to indicate the offset of the HARQ process number of PDSCH1 relative to one HARQ process number in the first HARQ process number (a kind of second indication information).
可选的,N个物理共享信道的CBGFI可以是相同的。这种情况下,控制信息可指示一个物理共享信道的CBGFI即可。例如,以控制信息为DCI,通信系统采用CBG的传输方案,M个第一物理共享信道包括PDSCH0,K个第二物理共享信道包括PDSCH1,第一字段为MCS字段为例,这种情况下,MCS字段可以无需指示PDSCH1的CBGFI,DCI中的CBGFI字段可指示有PDSCH0的CBGFI。相应的,终端设备可根据DCI中的CBGFI字段确定PDSCH0和PDSCH1的CBGFI。Optionally, the CBGFIs of the N physical shared channels may be the same. In this case, the control information may indicate the CBGFI of one physical shared channel. For example, if the control information is DCI, the communication system adopts the CBG transmission scheme, the M first physical shared channels include PDSCH0, the K second physical shared channels include PDSCH1, and the first field is the MCS field as an example. In this case, The MCS field may not need to indicate the CBGFI of PDSCH1, and the CBGFI field in the DCI may indicate the CBGFI of PDSCH0. Correspondingly, the terminal device can determine the CBGFI of PDSCH0 and PDSCH1 according to the CBGFI field in the DCI.
在一种可能的实施方式中,如果N大于M,该控制信息还包括第三指示信息。该第三指示信息用于指示N个物理共享信道的RV,该第三指示信息包括N个比特,N个比特分别用于指示N个物理共享信道的RV,即N个比特中的每个比特用于指示N个物理共享信道中的一个物理共享信道的RV。这样一来,可以灵活地指示每个物理共享信道的RV。In a possible implementation manner, if N is greater than M, the control information further includes third indication information. The third indication information is used to indicate the RV of the N physical shared channels, and the third indication information includes N bits, and the N bits are respectively used to indicate the RVs of the N physical shared channels, that is, each bit in the N bits It is used to indicate the RV of one physical shared channel among the N physical shared channels. In this way, the RV of each physical shared channel can be flexibly indicated.
可选的,第三指示信息的取值不同,则N个物理共享信道的RV也不同,终端设备和网络设备中可被预配置第三指示信息的取值与N个物理共享信道的RV之间的第二对应关系。网络设备可根据该第二对应关系,确定第三指示信息的取值。相应的,终端设备接收控制信息之后,可根据该控制信息中的第三指示信息,以及第二对应关系,确定N个物理共享信道各自的RV。Optionally, if the value of the third indication information is different, the RVs of the N physical shared channels are also different, and the terminal device and the network device may be pre-configured with the value of the third indication information and the RV of the N physical shared channels. The second corresponding relationship between. The network device may determine the value of the third indication information according to the second correspondence. Correspondingly, after receiving the control information, the terminal device may determine the respective RVs of the N physical shared channels according to the third indication information in the control information and the second corresponding relationship.
例如,下面对第三指示信息中的1个比特对应的一个物理共享信道的RV之间的关系示如下表4所示。For example, the relationship between RVs of a physical shared channel corresponding to 1 bit in the third indication information is shown in Table 4 below.
表4Table 4
1个比特的取值1 bit value 冗余版本 redundant version
00 00
11 22
例如N的取值为2,如果网络设备确定一个物理共享信道的RV为2,另一个物理共享信道的RV为0,那么该网络设备可根据上表4,确定第三指示信息的取值可为“10”。终端设备接收该第三指示信息之后,可根据第三指示信息以及上表4的内容,确定2个物理共享信道中一个物理共享信道的RV为2,另一个物理共享信道的RV为0。For example, the value of N is 2. If the network device determines that the RV of one physical shared channel is 2 and the RV of another physical shared channel is 0, then the network device can determine that the value of the third indication information can be based on Table 4 above. to "10". After receiving the third indication information, the terminal device can determine that the RV of one of the two physical shared channels is 2 and that the RV of the other physical shared channel is 0 according to the third indication information and the contents of Table 4 above.
在另一种可能的实施方式中,如果N大于M,且N个物理共享信道共享RV,那么第三指示信息的N个比特可用于指示N个物理共享信道中的任意一个物理共享信道,这样当 N等于2或大于2时,N个比特可以指示更多地的冗余版本。In another possible implementation manner, if N is greater than M, and N physical shared channels share the RV, then N bits of the third indication information may be used to indicate any one of the N physical shared channels, such that When N is equal to 2 or greater than 2, N bits may indicate more redundancy versions.
可选的,如果通信系统支持基于CBG的传输方案,该控制信息还可包括CBGTI。CBGTI用于指示N个物理共享信道重传的CBG。可选的,该CBGTI可通过控制信息中的第四字段承载。第四字段与前文中的第一字段可为同一字段,也可为不同的字段,本申请实施例对此不做限定。第四字段例如为CBGTI字段。Optionally, if the communication system supports a CBG-based transmission scheme, the control information may also include CBGTI. The CBGTI is used to indicate the CBGs for N physical shared channel retransmissions. Optionally, the CBGTI may be carried by the fourth field in the control information. The fourth field and the first field above may be the same field or different fields, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. The fourth field is, for example, the CBGTI field.
终端设备可被预配置为支持基于CBG的传输。例如,网络设备向终端设备发送第六配置信息。该第六配置信息包括第五指示信息,该第五指示信息用于指示终端设备开启基于CBG的传输。End devices may be pre-configured to support CBG-based transport. For example, the network device sends sixth configuration information to the terminal device. The sixth configuration information includes fifth indication information, where the fifth indication information is used to instruct the terminal device to enable CBG-based transmission.
例如,第六配置信息携带在RRC消息的码块组传输(codeblockgrouptransmission)信令中。如果终端设备开启了基于CBG的传输,那么这种情况下,控制信息也就相应包括了CBGTI字段。以控制信息为DCI1_1为例,如果终端设备被开启了基于CBG的传输,该DCI1_1也就包括CBGTI字段。For example, the sixth configuration information is carried in code block group transmission (codeblock group transmission) signaling of the RRC message. If the terminal device enables CBG-based transmission, in this case, the control information also includes the CBGTI field accordingly. Taking the control information as DCI1_1 as an example, if the terminal device is enabled for CBG-based transmission, the DCI1_1 also includes the CBGTI field.
可选的,网络设备还可通过第七配置信息为终端设备配置每个传输块包括的码块组的最大数量(maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock)。Optionally, the network device may also configure the maximum number of code block groups included in each transport block (maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock) for the terminal device through the seventh configuration information.
示例性的,第七配置信息携带在RRC消息的codeblockgrouptransmission信令中,网络设备可通过codeblockgrouptransmission信令中的maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock参数,从而为终端设备配置每个TB的CBG的最大个数。每个TB的CBG的最大个数决定了控制信息中的CBGTI字段的大小。例如,maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock=n8,即CBGTI字段包括8比特。Exemplarily, the seventh configuration information is carried in the codeblockgrouptransmission signaling of the RRC message, and the network device can configure the maximum number of CBGs for each TB for the terminal device through the maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock parameter in the codeblockgrouptransmission signaling. The maximum number of CBGs per TB determines the size of the CBGTI field in the control information. For example, maxCodeBlockGroupsPerTransportBlock=n8, that is, the CBGTI field includes 8 bits.
可选的,该控制信息还可包括第一行索引。该第一行索引属于时域资源分配列表中的至少一个行索引。该第一行索引用于指示时域资源分配列表中指示的物理共享信道的个数。时域资源分配列表的含义可参照前文。例如,第一行索引为上述表1中的4,上述表1中第4行对应指示了2个物理共享信道各自的时域资源信息,相当于该第一行索引指示了2个物理共享信道。Optionally, the control information may also include the first row index. The first row index belongs to at least one row index in the time domain resource allocation list. The index in the first row is used to indicate the number of physical shared channels indicated in the time domain resource allocation list. The meaning of the time domain resource allocation list can be referred to above. For example, the first row index is 4 in the above table 1, and the fourth row in the above table 1 corresponds to indicating the time domain resource information of the two physical shared channels, which is equivalent to indicating that the first row index indicates the two physical shared channels .
作为一个示例,第一行索引通过控制信息中的第五字段承载。第五字段与第一字段可为同一字段,也可为不同的字段,本申请实施例对此不做限定。第五字段例如为时域资源分配(time domain resource assignment,TDRA)字段。As an example, the first row index is carried by the fifth field in the control information. The fifth field and the first field may be the same field or different fields, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. The fifth field is, for example, a time domain resource assignment (time domain resource assignment, TDRA) field.
可选的,该控制信息还包括第六指示信息,该第六指示信息用于指示N个物理共享信道的频域资源信息。示例性的,该第六指示信息可通过控制信息中的频域资源分配(frequency domain resource assignment,FDRA)字段承载。其中,频域资源信息例如资源块(resource block,RB)的数量。N个物理共享信道的频域资源信息均相同,或者存在任意两个物理共享信道的频域资源信息不同,本申请实施例对此不做限定。Optionally, the control information further includes sixth indication information, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate frequency domain resource information of the N physical shared channels. Exemplarily, the sixth indication information may be carried by a frequency domain resource assignment (frequency domain resource assignment, FDRA) field in the control information. Wherein, the resource information in the frequency domain is, for example, the number of resource blocks (resource block, RB). The frequency domain resource information of the N physical shared channels is the same, or the frequency domain resource information of any two physical shared channels is different, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
作为一个示例,控制信息可在一个时隙上调度N个物理共享信道,也可在不同时隙上调度N个物理共享信道,本申请实施例对此不做限定。如果控制信息在不同时隙上调度N个物理共享信道,那么该上述中的时域资源分配列表还可包括至少一个物理共享信道中各自对应的时隙。As an example, the control information may schedule N physical shared channels in one time slot, or may schedule N physical shared channels in different time slots, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. If the control information schedules N physical shared channels in different time slots, then the above time domain resource allocation list may further include the respective corresponding time slots in at least one physical shared channel.
上述介绍了控制信息的具体内容,终端设备接收控制信息之后,也就确定N个物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号。由于第一字段在N与M的大小关系不同的情况下,控制信息所承载的指示信息不同,自然终端设备解析控制信息得到的信息也有区别。因此,终端设备在解析控制信息之前,可先确定该N和M的大小关系。如前文论述的内容,M的取 值是预设的。因此终端设备只需确定N的取值,便能确定N与M之间的大小关系。下面对终端设备确定N的取值的方式进行介绍。The specific content of the control information is introduced above. After receiving the control information, the terminal device also determines the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels. Since the first field has a different size relationship between N and M, the indication information carried by the control information is different, and naturally the information obtained by the terminal device by parsing the control information is also different. Therefore, before parsing the control information, the terminal device may first determine the magnitude relationship between N and M. As discussed above, the value of M is preset. Therefore, the terminal device can determine the size relationship between N and M only by determining the value of N. The following describes how the terminal device determines the value of N.
当控制信息包含的信息不同时,那么终端设备确定N的取值的方式也有区别,下面分别进行介绍。When the information contained in the control information is different, the way for the terminal device to determine the value of N is also different, which will be introduced respectively below.
方式一,控制信息包括CBGTI。终端设备根据CBGTI和最大可调度的物理共享信道的个数,确定N的取值。 Mode 1, the control information includes the CBGTI. The terminal device determines the value of N according to the CBGTI and the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels.
当控制信息的最大可调度的物理共享信道的个数确定的情况下,CBGTI最多可指示的物理共享信道的数量也是确定的,例如,最大可调度的物理共享信道的个数为L,那么CBGTI最多可指示的物理共享信道的数量也就是L。终端设备可根据CBGTI的比特数和控制信息最大可指示的物理共享信道的个数,从而确定每个物理共享信道在CBGTI中占用几个比特,进而根据每个物理共享信道在CBGTI中对应的各个比特的取值,确定N的取值。When the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels of control information is determined, the maximum number of physical shared channels that can be indicated by CBGTI is also determined. For example, the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels is L, then CBGTI The maximum number of physical shared channels that can be indicated is L. The terminal device can determine how many bits each physical shared channel occupies in the CBGTI according to the number of bits of the CBGTI and the maximum number of physical shared channels that can be indicated by the control information, and then according to each physical shared channel corresponding to each physical shared channel in the CBGTI The value of the bit determines the value of N.
例如,CBGTI包括8个比特,最大可调度的物理共享信道的个数为2,那么表示CBGTI中的前4个比特指示一个PDSCH,CBGTI中的后4个比特表示另一个PDSCH。示例性地,如果终端设备确定CBGTI中的后4个比特均为0,即为“0000”,那么表示该CBGTI本次仅调度一个PDSCH,相应的,确定N的取值为1。For example, the CBGTI includes 8 bits, and the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels is 2, which means that the first 4 bits in the CBGTI indicate one PDSCH, and the last 4 bits in the CBGTI indicate another PDSCH. Exemplarily, if the terminal device determines that the last 4 bits in the CBGTI are all 0, that is, "0000", it means that the CBGTI only schedules one PDSCH this time, and accordingly, determine that the value of N is 1.
上述方式一可适用于通信系统支持基于CBG传输方案的情况。且在方式一中,无需网络设备单独向终端设备指示N的取值,可相对减少网络设备与终端设备之间的交互。The first manner above is applicable to the case where the communication system supports a CBG-based transmission scheme. Moreover, in the first manner, the network device does not need to separately indicate the value of N to the terminal device, which can relatively reduce the interaction between the network device and the terminal device.
方式二、控制信息包括第一行索引。终端设备从时域资源分配列表中确定第一行索引所指示的物理共享信道的个数,确定N的取值。 Mode 2, the control information includes the index of the first row. The terminal device determines the number of physical shared channels indicated by the index in the first row from the time domain resource allocation list, and determines the value of N.
第一行索引和时域资源分配列表的含义可参照前文。终端设备可确定该第一行索引,在时域资源分配列表中所对应的物理共享信道的时域资源,对应也就可确定出本次调度的物理共享信道的个数,从而确定N的取值。For the meaning of the first line index and the time domain resource allocation list, please refer to the above. The terminal device can determine the index in the first row, and the corresponding physical shared channel time domain resources in the time domain resource allocation list can also determine the number of physical shared channels scheduled this time, so as to determine the selection of N value.
例如,以时域资源分配列表为上表2为例,控制信息中的第一行索引为1,终端设备根据该第一行索引,确定该第一行索引在时域资源分配列表中对应了2个物理共享信道,因此可确定N的取值为2。For example, taking the time domain resource allocation list as the above Table 2 as an example, the first row index in the control information is 1, and the terminal device determines that the first row index corresponds to the time domain resource allocation list according to the first row index. 2 physical shared channels, so it can be determined that the value of N is 2.
可选的,终端设备还可以根据该第一行索引,从该时域资源分配列表中确定N个物理共享信道中的每个物理共享信道的时域资源信息。Optionally, the terminal device may also determine the time domain resource information of each of the N physical shared channels from the time domain resource allocation list according to the first row index.
例如,第一行索引为表2中的4,且当DMRS-类型(type)A-位置为2,PDSCH映射类型为type A时,终端设备根据该第一行索引,从时域资源分配列表中确定2个物理共享信道的时域资源信息。请参照图7,为本申请实施例提供的这2个物理共享信道的时频资源配置示意图。图7中的横坐标表示一个时隙上的符号(symbol in a slot),纵坐标表示子载波(sub-carrier),DMRS位于该时隙符号2上。图7中是以PDSCH0和PDSCH1的频域资源相同为例,这种情况下,PDSCH0所占用的符号上的RB的数量与PDSCH1所占用的符号上的RB的数量相同。图7中是以每个物理共享信道占用了3个RB(每个RB由12个资源元素(resource element,RE)构成,即图7中每个符号包含了36个RE。PDSCH0用于承载TB1,PDSCH1用于承载TB2。在图7中PDSCH0的起始符号为2,占用的符号数为7,PDSCH1的起始符号为9,占用的符号数为5。For example, the first row index is 4 in Table 2, and when the DMRS-type (type) A-position is 2, and the PDSCH mapping type is type A, the terminal device allocates resources from the time domain resource allocation list according to the first row index The time-domain resource information of two physical shared channels is determined in . Please refer to FIG. 7 , which is a schematic diagram of time-frequency resource configuration of the two physical shared channels provided by the embodiment of the present application. The abscissa in Figure 7 represents a symbol on a slot (symbol in a slot), the ordinate represents a sub-carrier (sub-carrier), and the DMRS is located on symbol 2 of the slot. In FIG. 7 , the frequency domain resources of PDSCH0 and PDSCH1 are the same as an example. In this case, the number of RBs on the symbol occupied by PDSCH0 is the same as the number of RBs on the symbol occupied by PDSCH1 . In Figure 7, each physical shared channel occupies 3 RBs (each RB is composed of 12 resource elements (resource element, RE), that is, each symbol in Figure 7 contains 36 REs. PDSCH0 is used to carry TB1 , PDSCH1 is used to bear TB2. In Figure 7, the start symbol of PDSCH0 is 2, and the number of symbols occupied is 7, and the start symbol of PDSCH1 is 9, and the number of symbols occupied is 5.
上述方式二可适用于通信系统采用基于CBG的传输方案的情况,也可适用通信系统采用基于非CBG的传输方案的情况。The second manner above is applicable to the case where the communication system adopts a CBG-based transmission scheme, and is also applicable to the case where the communication system adopts a non-CBG-based transmission scheme.
方式三,控制信息包括第一行索引和CBGTI。终端设备可根据CBGTI,确定N的取值。 Mode 3, the control information includes the index of the first row and the CBGTI. The terminal device can determine the value of N according to the CBGTI.
这种情况下,控制信息包括第一行索引和CBGTI,终端设备可根据CBGTI,确定N的取值,其中根据CBGTI确定N的取值的方式可参照前文。In this case, the control information includes the first row index and the CBGTI, and the terminal device can determine the value of N according to the CBGTI, and the manner of determining the value of N according to the CBGTI can refer to the foregoing.
终端设备确定N与M的大小关系之后,可对应地从控制信息中,确定出N个物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号。如果控制信息的内容不同,那么终端设备确定N个物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程的方式也有区别,下面分别进行介绍。After the terminal device determines the size relationship between N and M, it can correspondingly determine the HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels from the control information. If the contents of the control information are different, the manners for the terminal equipment to determine the respective HARQ processes of the N physical shared channels are also different, which will be introduced respectively below.
情况一,N等于M。 Case 1, N is equal to M.
如果M为1,且控制信息指示或包括一个物理共享信道的第一HARQ进程号。这种情况下,终端设备可直接根据第一HARQ进程号,确定该物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。If M is 1, and the control information indicates or includes the first HARQ process number of a physical shared channel. In this case, the terminal device may directly determine the HARQ process number of the physical shared channel according to the first HARQ process number.
如果M大于1,且第一HARQ进程号指示或包含了N个物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号。这种情况下,终端设备解析第一HARQ进程号,可获得N个物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号。If M is greater than 1, and the first HARQ process number indicates or includes the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels. In this case, the terminal device can obtain the respective HARQ process numbers of the N physical shared channels by analyzing the first HARQ process number.
如果M大于1,且第一HARQ进程号指示或包含了N个物理共享信道中的第一部分物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。在这种情况下,终端设备可解析第一HARQ进程号,可获得N个物理共享信道中的第一部分物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。终端设备可根据第一规则,以及第一部分物理共享信道的HARQ进程号,确定出N个物理共享信道中的第二部分物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。其中,第一部分物理共享信道和第二部分物理共享信道的含义可参照前文。If M is greater than 1, and the first HARQ process number indicates or includes the HARQ process numbers of the first part of the N physical shared channels. In this case, the terminal device can analyze the first HARQ process number, and can obtain the HARQ process numbers of the first part of the N physical shared channels. The terminal device may determine the HARQ process numbers of the second part of the physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels according to the first rule and the HARQ process numbers of the first part of the physical shared channels. For the meanings of the first part of the physical shared channel and the second part of the physical shared channel, reference may be made to the foregoing.
可选的,如果控制信息还包括第三指示信息,那么终端设备可根据第三指示信息,确定N个物理共享信道各自的RV。Optionally, if the control information further includes third indication information, the terminal device may determine the respective RVs of the N physical shared channels according to the third indication information.
可选的,终端设备可根据控制信息中的第一指示信息,确定N个物理共享信道各自的MCS。Optionally, the terminal device may determine the respective MCSs of the N physical shared channels according to the first indication information in the control information.
情况二,N大于M。 Case 2, N is greater than M.
1、第二指示信息所指示的第一HARQ进程信息为第二HARQ进程号。1. The first HARQ process information indicated by the second indication information is the second HARQ process number.
如果K为1,终端设备可根据该第一指示信息,确定这一个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。If K is 1, the terminal device may determine the HARQ process number of the second physical shared channel according to the first indication information.
如果K大于1,且该第二HARQ进程号指示了K个第二物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号,那么终端设备可根据该第二指示信息,确定K个第二物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号。If K is greater than 1, and the second HARQ process number indicates the respective HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels, then the terminal device can determine the respective HARQ processes of the K second physical shared channels according to the second indication information Number.
如果K大于1,且该HARQ进程号为K个第二物理共享信道中的第三部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号,那么终端设备可根据该第二指示信息,确定第三部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。终端设备可根据第二规则,以及第三部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号,确定第四部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。其中,第三部分第二物理共享信道和第四部分第二物理共享信道的含义可参照前文。If K is greater than 1, and the HARQ process number is the HARQ process number of the third part of the second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels, then the terminal device can determine the third part of the second physical shared channel according to the second indication information. HARQ process ID of the physical shared channel. The terminal device may determine the HARQ process numbers of the fourth part of the second physical shared channels according to the second rule and the HARQ process numbers of the third part of the second physical shared channels. For meanings of the third part of the second physical shared channel and the fourth part of the second physical shared channel, reference may be made to the foregoing.
2、第二指示信息所指示的第一HARQ进程信息为第二HARQ进程号的偏移量。2. The first HARQ process information indicated by the second indication information is an offset of the second HARQ process number.
(1),如果K为1,终端设备可根据第一HARQ进程号,确定M个第一物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号,确定的方式可参照前文。并根据该第二HARQ进程号的偏移量,以及M个第一物理共享信道中的目标第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号,确定K个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。(1) If K is 1, the terminal device may determine the respective HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels according to the first HARQ process numbers, and the determination method may refer to the foregoing. And according to the offset of the second HARQ process number and the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel in the M first physical shared channels, determine the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels.
(2),如果K大于1,且该第二HARQ进程号的偏移量包括K个第二物理共享信道中的第五部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号相对于第一HARQ进程号的偏移量。(2), if K is greater than 1, and the offset of the second HARQ process number includes the HARQ process number of the fifth part of the second physical shared channel in the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process number Offset.
这种情况下,终端设备可根据第一HARQ进程号,确定M个第一物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号,确定的方式可参照前文。并根据该第二HARQ进程号的偏移量,以及M个第一物理共享信道中的目标第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号,确定K个第二物理共享信道中的第五部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。In this case, the terminal device may determine the respective HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels according to the first HARQ process numbers, and the determination method may refer to the foregoing. And according to the offset of the second HARQ process number, and the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel in the M first physical shared channels, determine the fifth part of the second physical channel in the K second physical shared channels The HARQ process ID of the shared channel.
进一步地,终端设备可根据第三规则,以及K个第二物理共享信道中的第五部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号,确定K个第二物理共享信道中第六部分第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号。其中,第五部分第二物理共享信道和第六部分第二物理共享信道的含义可参照前文。Further, the terminal device may determine the sixth part of the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels according to the third rule and the HARQ process number of the fifth part of the second physical shared channels among the K second physical shared channels. The HARQ process ID of the channel. For meanings of the fifth part of the second physical shared channel and the sixth part of the second physical shared channel, reference may be made to the foregoing.
情况2,如果K大于1,且该HARQ进程号的偏移量包括K个第二物理共享信道中的全部第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号相对于第一HARQ进程号的偏移量。 Case 2, if K is greater than 1, and the offset of the HARQ process number includes the offset of the HARQ process numbers of all the second physical shared channels in the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process number.
这种情况下,终端设备可根据第一HARQ进程号,确定M个第一物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号,确定的方式可参照前文。终端设备根据M个第一物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号,以及该HARQ进程号的偏移量,从而确定K个第二物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号。In this case, the terminal device may determine the respective HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels according to the first HARQ process numbers, and the determination method may refer to the foregoing. The terminal device determines the respective HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels according to the respective HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels and the offset of the HARQ process numbers.
具体的,如果第一HARQ进程号包括一个第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号,那么终端设备可根据该第一HARQ进程号,确定K个第二物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号。或者例如,如果第一HARQ进程号包括多个第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号,那么终端设备可确定目标第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号,并根据目标第一物理共享信道的HARQ进程号,以及该HARQ进程号的偏移量,从而确定K个第二物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号。Specifically, if the first HARQ process number includes a HARQ process number of the first physical shared channel, then the terminal device may determine the respective HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels according to the first HARQ process number. Or for example, if the first HARQ process number includes multiple HARQ process numbers of the first physical shared channel, then the terminal device can determine the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel, and according to the HARQ process number of the target first physical shared channel , and the offset of the HARQ process number, so as to determine the respective HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels.
示例性的,例如,如果第一字段还承载K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的NDI,那么终端设备可根据该第一字段,从而确定K个第二物理共享信道对应的NDI。又例如,第一字段还承载N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量,那么终端设备可根据该N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量,从而确定N个物理共享信道对应的MCS。又例如,第一字段还承载了K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的CBGFI,那么终端设备可根据该K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的CBGFI,确定N个物理共享信道各自的CBGFI。Exemplarily, for example, if the first field also carries the NDI of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels, then the terminal device may determine the K second physical shared channels according to the first field The corresponding NDI. For another example, the first field also carries the offsets of the MCS indexes of the N physical shared channels, then the terminal device can determine the MCS corresponding to the N physical shared channels according to the offsets of the MCS indexes of the N physical shared channels . For another example, the first field also carries the CBGFI of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels, then the terminal device may The CBGFI of each of the N physical shared channels is determined.
需要说明的是,网络设备可先执行S601和S602,再执行S603,或者网络设备同时执行S601、S602和S603,本申请实施例对此不做限定。It should be noted that the network device may execute S601 and S602 first, and then execute S603, or the network device may execute S601, S602, and S603 at the same time, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
S604,网络设备向终端设备发送N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元。相应的,终端设备通过N个物理共享信道各自对应的HARQ进程,接收N个物理共享信道各自对应的传输单元。S604. The network device sends the transmission units respectively carried by the N physical shared channels to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the transmission units corresponding to each of the N physical shared channels through the HARQ process corresponding to each of the N physical shared channels.
无论N和M的大小关系如何,网络设备均可向终端设备发送N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元。其中,N个物理共享信道各自所承载的传输单元可不完全相同,也可相同。另外,网络设备向终端设备发送N个物理共享信道各自所承载的传输单元的时间可不完全相同,也可相同,本申请实施例对此不做限定。Regardless of the relationship between the sizes of N and M, the network device may send the transmission units respectively carried by the N physical shared channels to the terminal device. Wherein, the transmission units carried by each of the N physical shared channels may not be completely the same, or may be the same. In addition, the time for the network device to send the transmission units carried by each of the N physical shared channels to the terminal device may not be exactly the same, or may be the same, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
可选的,终端设备可从网络设备接收第三配置信息,该第三配置信息用于配置第一DMRS。该第三配置信息例如携带在RRC消息中。例如,N个物理共享信道各自的DMRS 均相同,该第三配置信息可仅配置一个第一DMRS。终端设备获得该第一DMRS之后,可根据第一DMRS,分别对N个物理共享信道进行信道估计。这种情况下,第三配置信息可仅配置一个DMRS即可,从而减少第三配置信息所占用的比特数。Optionally, the terminal device may receive third configuration information from the network device, where the third configuration information is used to configure the first DMRS. The third configuration information is, for example, carried in an RRC message. For example, the DMRSs of the N physical shared channels are all the same, and only one first DMRS may be configured in the third configuration information. After obtaining the first DMRS, the terminal device may respectively perform channel estimation on the N physical shared channels according to the first DMRS. In this case, only one DMRS may be configured in the third configuration information, thereby reducing the number of bits occupied by the third configuration information.
终端设备可通过N个物理共享信道各自对应的HARQ进程,接收N个物理共享信道各自对应的传输单元。例如,终端设备可分别根据N个物理共享信道各自的时域资源信息以及频域资源信息,接收N个物理共享信道各自对应的传输单元。The terminal device may receive transmission units corresponding to each of the N physical shared channels through HARQ processes corresponding to each of the N physical shared channels. For example, the terminal device may receive transmission units corresponding to each of the N physical shared channels according to respective time domain resource information and frequency domain resource information of the N physical shared channels.
S605,根据N个物理共享信道的解码结果,确定N个第一HARQ应答信息。S605. Determine N pieces of first HARQ response information according to the decoding results of the N physical shared channels.
终端设备接收N个物理共享信道各自的传输单元时,终端设备对N个物理共享信道中每个物理共享信道进行解码,具体对每个物理共享信道上的传输单元的解码,以此类推,对N个物理共享信道进行解码后,也就可获得N个物理共享信道的解码结果。终端设备根据N个物理共享信道各自的解码结果,确定N个物理共享信道中每个物理共享信道对应的第一HARQ应答信息,并对N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定,从而得到第二HARQ应答信息。其中,空间绑定是对N个第一HARQ应答信息中的P比特中的同个位置上的比特进行逻辑与操作。When the terminal device receives the respective transmission units of the N physical shared channels, the terminal device decodes each physical shared channel in the N physical shared channels, and specifically decodes the transmission unit on each physical shared channel, and so on. After the N physical shared channels are decoded, the decoding results of the N physical shared channels can also be obtained. The terminal device determines the first HARQ response information corresponding to each physical shared channel in the N physical shared channels according to the respective decoding results of the N physical shared channels, and performs spatial binding on the N first HARQ response information, thereby obtaining the first HARQ response information. Two HARQ response information. Wherein, the spatial bundling is to perform a logical AND operation on the bits at the same position among the P bits in the N pieces of first HARQ response information.
下面以终端设备确定N个物理共享信道中的一个物理共享信道的第一HARQ应答信息为例,对确定第一HARQ应答信息的过程进行介绍。Taking the terminal device determining the first HARQ response information of one physical shared channel among the N physical shared channels as an example, the process of determining the first HARQ response information will be introduced below.
如果终端设备确定该物理共享信道中的一个传输单元的解码结果为解码成功,则确定对该传输单元进行肯定应答ACK。如果终端设备确定该传输单元的解码结果为解码失败,则确定对该传输单元进行否定应答NACK。以此类推,终端设备可获得该物理共享信道上的至少一个传输单元的HARQ应答的组合,也就获得了第一HARQ应答信息。一个物理共享信道传输P个传输单元,对应的,该第一HARQ应答信息包括P比特,即P比特中一个比特对应该物理共享信道上的一个传输单元,其中P比特中的每个比特用于指示该物理共享信道上的一个传输单元的ACK或NACK,P为正整数。If the terminal device determines that the decoding result of a transmission unit in the physical shared channel is successful, it determines to perform an acknowledgment ACK on the transmission unit. If the terminal device determines that the decoding result of the transmission unit is a decoding failure, it determines to perform a negative acknowledgment NACK on the transmission unit. By analogy, the terminal device can obtain a combination of HARQ responses of at least one transmission unit on the physical shared channel, and thus obtain the first HARQ response information. A physical shared channel transmits P transmission units. Correspondingly, the first HARQ response information includes P bits, that is, one bit in the P bits corresponds to a transmission unit on the physical shared channel, and each bit in the P bits is used for Indicates ACK or NACK of a transmission unit on the physical shared channel, and P is a positive integer.
以此类推,终端设备可获得N个物理共享信道各自的第一HARQ应答信息,也就获得了N个第一HARQ应答信息。By analogy, the terminal device can obtain the respective first HARQ response information of the N physical shared channels, and thus obtain the N first HARQ response information.
例如,以该通信系统采用非CBG的传输方案,传输单元是TB为例,终端设备可针对一个TB生成一个ACK或NACK,获得该TB的第一HARQ应答信息。这种情况下,第一HARQ应答信息包括P比特,P的取值为1,该1比特用于指示该TB解码结果的ACK或NACK。For example, if the communication system adopts a non-CBG transmission scheme and the transmission unit is a TB as an example, the terminal device may generate an ACK or NACK for a TB, and obtain the first HARQ response information of the TB. In this case, the first HARQ response information includes P bits, where the value of P is 1, and the 1 bit is used to indicate the ACK or NACK of the decoding result of the TB.
或者例如,以该通信系统采用CBG的传输方案,一个PDSCH包含一个TB且该TB包含4个CBG为例,终端设备可针对4个CBG分别生成4个ACK或NACK,获得该PDSCH的第一HARQ应答信息。这种情况下,第一HARQ应答信息包括P比特,P的取值为4,该4比特用于指示该4个CBG解码结果的ACK或NACK。Or for example, if the communication system adopts the CBG transmission scheme, one PDSCH contains one TB and the TB contains 4 CBGs as an example, the terminal device can generate 4 ACKs or NACKs for the 4 CBGs respectively, and obtain the first HARQ of the PDSCH Answer message. In this case, the first HARQ response information includes P bits, where the value of P is 4, and the 4 bits are used to indicate ACK or NACK of the 4 CBG decoding results.
例如,请参图8,为本申请实施例提供的对N=2,M=1个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定(spatial bundling)的示意图。如图8所示,终端设备在D03处接收PDSCH0上的CBG0、CBG1、CBG2和CBG3,并接收PDSCH1上的CBG0、CBG1、CBG2和CBG3。For example, please refer to FIG. 8 , which is a schematic diagram of performing spatial bundling on N=2, M=1 first HARQ response information provided by the embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 8, the terminal device receives CBG0, CBG1, CBG2 and CBG3 on PDSCH0 at D03, and receives CBG0, CBG1, CBG2 and CBG3 on PDSCH1.
终端设备确定PDSCH0和PDSCH1上的CBG0均解码成功,则对PDSCH0和PDSCH1上的CBG0生成ACK(在图8中以A示意),ACK在第一HARQ应答信息中以“1”表示。终端设备确定PDSCH0和PDSCH1上的CBG1均解码成功,则对PDSCH0和PDSCH1上的CBG1生成ACK。终端设备确定PDSCH0上的CBG2解码失败,则对PDSCH0上的CBG2 生成NACK(在图8中以N示意),终端设备确定PDSCH0上的CBG2解码成功,则对PDSCH0上的CBG2生成ACK。其中,NACK在第一HARQ应答信息中以“0”表示。终端设备确定PDSCH0和PDSCH1上的CBG3均解码成功,则对PDSCH0和PDSCH1上的CBG3生成ACK。终端设备确定PDSCH0的第一HARQ应答信息可表示为“1101”,确定PDSCH1的第一HARQ应答信息可表示为“1111”。The terminal device determines that CBG0 on PDSCH0 and PDSCH1 are successfully decoded, and then generates ACK (indicated by A in FIG. 8 ) for CBG0 on PDSCH0 and PDSCH1, and the ACK is represented by "1" in the first HARQ response information. The terminal device determines that CBG1 on PDSCH0 and PDSCH1 are decoded successfully, and then generates ACK for CBG1 on PDSCH0 and PDSCH1. If the terminal device determines that the decoding of CBG2 on PDSCH0 fails, it generates a NACK for CBG2 on PDSCH0 (indicated by N in FIG. 8 ), and if it determines that the decoding of CBG2 on PDSCH0 succeeds, it generates an ACK for CBG2 on PDSCH0. Wherein, NACK is represented by "0" in the first HARQ response information. The terminal device determines that CBG3 on PDSCH0 and PDSCH1 are decoded successfully, and then generates ACK for CBG3 on PDSCH0 and PDSCH1. The terminal device determines that the first HARQ response information for PDSCH0 may be expressed as "1101", and the first HARQ response information for determining PDSCH1 may be expressed as "1111".
S606,对N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定,获得第二HARQ应答信息。S606. Perform spatial binding on N pieces of first HARQ response information to obtain second HARQ response information.
在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备可直接向网络设备反馈一个物理共享信道对应的第一HARQ应答信息。但当N的取值大于1时,可能会导致终端设备需反馈的第一HARQ应答信息较多,且由于控制信息每次调度物理共享信道的个数N的取值是不确定的,这也就导致终端设备每次需反馈的第一HARQ应答信息所占用的比特数是不确定的。相应的,由于网络设备每次无法确定终端设备需要反馈的第一HARQ应答信息的比特数,也就不利于网络设备接收第一HARQ应答信息。为此,在本申请实施例中,终端设备可对N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定,以获得包含P比特的第二HARQ应答信息。In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device may directly feed back the first HARQ response information corresponding to a physical shared channel to the network device. However, when the value of N is greater than 1, it may cause more first HARQ response information to be fed back by the terminal equipment, and since the value of the number N of physical shared channels scheduled by the control information each time is uncertain, this also As a result, the number of bits occupied by the first HARQ response information that the terminal equipment needs to feed back each time is uncertain. Correspondingly, since the network device cannot determine the number of bits of the first HARQ response information that the terminal device needs to feed back each time, it is not conducive for the network device to receive the first HARQ response information. For this reason, in this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may perform spatial bundling on N pieces of first HARQ response information to obtain second HARQ response information including P bits.
示例性的,N个第一HARQ应答信息中的每个第一HARQ应答信息均包括P比特,其中一个比特与一个物理共享信道中的一个传输单元对应。终端设备对N个第一HARQ应答信息的N个第i位进行逻辑与操作,i从1取值到P,从而获得第二HARQ应答信息。Exemplarily, each first HARQ response information in the N pieces of first HARQ response information includes P bits, and one bit corresponds to one transmission unit in one physical shared channel. The terminal device performs a logical AND operation on the N i-th bits of the N first HARQ response information, where i takes a value from 1 to P, so as to obtain the second HARQ response information.
例如,以P为4,N个第一HARQ应答信息包括如图8所示的两个第一HARQ应答信息为例。终端设备对PDSCH0的第一HARQ应答信息中的第1位(取值为1)与PDSCH1的第一HARQ应答信息中的第1位(取值为1)进行逻辑与操作,获得1;终端设备对PDSCH0的第一HARQ应答信息中的第二位(取值为1)与PDSCH1的第一HARQ应答信息中的第二位(取值为1)进行逻辑与操作,获得1;终端设备可对PDSCH0的第一HARQ应答信息中的第三位(取值为0)与PDSCH1的第一HARQ应答信息中的第三位(取值为1)进行逻辑与操作,获得0;终端设备可对PDSCH0的第一HARQ应答信息中的第四位(取值为1)与PDSCH1的第一HARQ应答信息中的第四位(取值为1)进行逻辑与操作,获得1。终端设备组合所有逻辑与操作的结果,获得第二HARQ应答信息可具体表示为1101。因此,网络设备在接收到该第二HARQ应答信息后,会对PDSCH0和PDSCH1的CBG2都进行重传调度,尽管PDSCH1的CBG2解码正确。For example, taking P as 4, the N first HARQ response information includes two first HARQ response information as shown in FIG. 8 as an example. The terminal device performs a logical AND operation on the first bit (value 1) in the first HARQ response information of PDSCH0 and the first bit (value 1) in the first HARQ response information of PDSCH1 to obtain 1; the terminal device Perform a logical AND operation on the second bit (value 1) in the first HARQ response information of PDSCH0 and the second bit (value 1) in the first HARQ response information of PDSCH1 to obtain 1; the terminal device can The third bit in the first HARQ response information of PDSCH0 (the value is 0) and the third bit in the first HARQ response information of PDSCH1 (the value is 1) are logically ANDed to obtain 0; the terminal device can PDSCH0 The fourth bit (value 1) in the first HARQ response information of PDSCH1 is logically ANDed with the fourth bit (value 1) in the first HARQ response information of PDSCH1 to obtain 1. The terminal device combines the results of all logical AND operations to obtain the second HARQ response information, which may be specifically represented as 1101 . Therefore, after receiving the second HARQ response information, the network device will perform retransmission scheduling for both CBG2 of PDSCH0 and PDSCH1, although the decoding of CBG2 of PDSCH1 is correct.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备可对N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定,这样即使N的取值不确定,终端设备均可向网络设备反馈包括P比特的第二HARQ应答信息,使得终端设备反馈的第二HARQ应答信息所占用的比特数是确定的。并且,在控制信息调度多个物理共享信道时,可相对减少了终端设备上报的HARQ应答信息的比特数。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device can spatially bind the N first HARQ response information, so that even if the value of N is uncertain, the terminal device can feed back the second HARQ response information including P bits to the network device, The number of bits occupied by the second HARQ response information fed back by the terminal equipment is determined. Moreover, when the control information schedules multiple physical shared channels, the number of bits of the HARQ response information reported by the terminal equipment can be relatively reduced.
可选的,终端设备需对N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定可以是协议规定的。或者,终端设备可根据第四指示信息,确定是否对N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定。Optionally, it may be stipulated in a protocol that the terminal device needs to spatially bind the N first HARQ response information. Alternatively, the terminal device may determine whether to perform spatial bundling on the N pieces of first HARQ response information according to the fourth indication information.
具体的,网络设备向终端设备发送第四配置信息,该第四配置信息可以是RRC消息中的PDSCH-config information element。该第四配置信息包括该第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示是否对控制信息调度的N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定。示例性地,该第四指示信息可以是第四配置信息中的一个信令,如重传允许空间绑定(allowedSpatialBundlingForRetransmission)。如果第四指示信息的取值为第一值,如allowedSpatialBundlingForRetransmission=‘1’,第一值指示终端设备需对N个第一HARQ 应答信息进行空间绑定。这种情况下,终端设备确定可采用上述过程对N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定,以获得第二HARQ应答信息。终端设备可将第二HARQ应答信息反馈给网络设备。如果第四指示信息的取值为第二值,如allowedSpatialBundlingForRetransmission=‘0’,第二值指示终端设备不需要对N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定。这种情况下,终端设备可直接将N个第一HARQ应答信息反馈给网络设备。Specifically, the network device sends fourth configuration information to the terminal device, where the fourth configuration information may be a PDSCH-config information element in the RRC message. The fourth configuration information includes the fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate whether to spatially bundle the N pieces of first HARQ response information scheduled by the control information. Exemplarily, the fourth indication information may be a signaling in the fourth configuration information, such as retransmission allowed spatial bundling (allowedSpatialBundlingForRetransmission). If the value of the fourth indication information is the first value, such as allowedSpatialBundlingForRetransmission='1', the first value indicates that the terminal device needs to perform spatial bundling on N pieces of first HARQ response information. In this case, the terminal device determines that the above process can be used to spatially bundle the N pieces of first HARQ response information, so as to obtain the second HARQ response information. The terminal device may feed back the second HARQ response information to the network device. If the value of the fourth indication information is the second value, such as allowedSpatialBundlingForRetransmission='0', the second value indicates that the terminal device does not need to perform spatial bundling on the N pieces of first HARQ response information. In this case, the terminal device may directly feed back the N first HARQ response information to the network device.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中是以终端设备向网络设备反馈第二HARQ应答信息为例,但当N的取值为1,或者终端设备被指示不进行空间绑定的情况下,终端设备可直接向网络设备反馈N个第一HARQ应答信息。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device feeds back the second HARQ response information to the network device as an example, but when the value of N is 1, or the terminal device is instructed not to perform spatial binding, the terminal The device may directly feed back N pieces of first HARQ response information to the network device.
S607,终端设备向网络设备发送第二HARQ应答信息。相应的,网络设备从终端设备接收该第二HARQ应答信息。S607. The terminal device sends the second HARQ response information to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device receives the second HARQ response information from the terminal device.
网络设备在接收第二HARQ应答信息之后,可根据第二HARQ应答信息的内容,确定N个物理共享信道各自的传输单元是否传输成功。如果确定某个物理共享信道的传输单元未传输成功,网络设备可继续重传该物理共享信道的传输单元。After receiving the second HARQ response information, the network device may determine whether the respective transmission units of the N physical shared channels are successfully transmitted according to the content of the second HARQ response information. If it is determined that the transmission unit of a physical shared channel has not been successfully transmitted, the network device may continue to retransmit the transmission unit of the physical shared channel.
例如,继续沿用图8所示的例子,网络设备接收到第二HARQ应答信息为1101,N的取值为2,那么网络设备确定PDSCH0和PDSCH1中的CBG2未传输成功,那么网络设备可向终端设备重传该CBG2。For example, continue to use the example shown in Figure 8, the network device receives the second HARQ response information is 1101, and the value of N is 2, then the network device determines that the CBG2 in PDSCH0 and PDSCH1 has not been successfully transmitted, then the network device can send a message to the terminal The device retransmits the CBG2.
可选的,本申请实施例中的第一配置信息、第二配置信息、第三配置信息和第四配置信息、第五配置信息、第六配置信息和第七配置信息均可通过一个消息发送给终端设备,例如均为RRC消息。或者,第一配置信息、第二配置信息、第三配置信息和第四配置信息、第五配置信息、第六配置信息和第七配置信息均通过不同的消息发送给终端设备,本申请实施例对此不做限定。Optionally, the first configuration information, the second configuration information, the third configuration information and the fourth configuration information, the fifth configuration information, the sixth configuration information and the seventh configuration information in the embodiment of the present application can all be sent in one message For terminal equipment, for example, they are all RRC messages. Alternatively, the first configuration information, the second configuration information, the third configuration information, the fourth configuration information, the fifth configuration information, the sixth configuration information, and the seventh configuration information are all sent to the terminal device through different messages. There is no limit to this.
可选的,本申请实施例中的第一字段、第二字段、第三字段和第四字段和第五字段均可为同一个字段。或者,第一字段、第二字段、第三字段和第四字段和第五字段均为不同的字段,本申请实施例对此不做限定。Optionally, the first field, the second field, the third field, the fourth field, and the fifth field in this embodiment of the present application may all be the same field. Alternatively, the first field, the second field, the third field, the fourth field, and the fifth field are all different fields, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
可选的,图6中的S601-S602、S604-S607均为可选的步骤。在图6中以虚线示意这些可选的步骤。Optionally, S601-S602 and S604-S607 in FIG. 6 are all optional steps. These optional steps are illustrated in dashed lines in FIG. 6 .
在图6所示的实施例中,网络设备可通过一个控制信息调度多个物理共享信道的传输,以减少信令开销。并且,在N和M的大小关系不同的情况下,第一字段承载不同的指示信息,减少了控制信息所占用的比特数。另外在不新增该控制信息字段的情况下,也可实现一个控制信息调度多个物理共享信道的传输。In the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 , the network device can schedule transmission of multiple physical shared channels through one piece of control information, so as to reduce signaling overhead. Moreover, in the case that the size relationship between N and M is different, the first field carries different indication information, which reduces the number of bits occupied by the control information. In addition, without adding the control information field, it is also possible to implement one control information to schedule the transmission of multiple physical shared channels.
上述图6是以该通信方法应用于图4所示的通信系统为例进行示例说明,该通信方法还可应用于图5所示的通信系统。在该通信方法应用于图5所示的通信系统的情况下,该控制信息例如为SCI,控制信息所调度的N个物理共享信道可均为PSSCH。相应的,图6中的网络设备可替换为第一终端设备,图6中的终端设备可替换为第二终端设备,第一终端设备与第二终端设备之间的交互过程可参照图6,此处不再一一列举。The foregoing FIG. 6 is illustrated by taking the communication method applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 4 as an example, and the communication method may also be applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 5 . When the communication method is applied to the communication system shown in FIG. 5 , the control information is, for example, SCI, and the N physical shared channels scheduled by the control information may all be PSSCHs. Correspondingly, the network device in FIG. 6 can be replaced by the first terminal device, and the terminal device in FIG. 6 can be replaced by the second terminal device. The interaction process between the first terminal device and the second terminal device can refer to FIG. 6 , They are not listed here.
图9示出了一种通信装置900的结构示意图。其中,通信装置900可以应用于终端设备,或者是终端设备中的装置,能够实现本申请实施例提供的方法中终端设备的功能;通信装置900也可以是能够支持终端设备实现本申请实施例提供的方法中终端设备的功能的装置。通信装置900可以是硬件结构、软件模块、或硬件结构加软件模块。通信装置900 可以由芯片系统实现。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。FIG. 9 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 900 . Among them, the communication device 900 can be applied to a terminal device, or a device in the terminal device, which can realize the functions of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of this application; the communication device 900 can also be able to support the terminal device to realize the The means of the function of the terminal equipment in the method. The communication device 900 may be a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module. The communication device 900 may be implemented by a system on a chip. In the embodiment of the present application, the system-on-a-chip may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
通信装置900可以包括收发模块901。The communication device 900 may include a transceiver module 901 .
收发模块901可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中从网络设备接收控制信息的步骤。还可以执行从网络设备接收第一配置信息,从网络设备接收第二配置信息,向网络设备发送第二HARQ应答信息,还可以用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程等。收发模块901用于通信装置900和其它模块进行通信,其可以是电路、器件、接口、总线、软件模块、收发器或者其它任意可以实现通信的装置。The transceiver module 901 may be configured to execute the step of receiving control information from a network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 . It may also perform receiving the first configuration information from the network device, receiving the second configuration information from the network device, sending the second HARQ response information to the network device, and other processes supporting the technology described herein, etc. The transceiver module 901 is used for the communication device 900 to communicate with other modules, and it may be a circuit, device, interface, bus, software module, transceiver or any other device capable of realizing communication.
可选的,通信装置900还包括处理模块902。在图9中以虚线框示意处理模块902为可选的。Optionally, the communication device 900 further includes a processing module 902 . In FIG. 9 , the processing module 902 is indicated by a dotted line box, which is optional.
示例性的,处理模块902可以用于执行前文中的S605和S606等步骤,还可以用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程等。Exemplarily, the processing module 902 may be used to execute steps such as S605 and S606 above, and may also be used to support other processes of the technologies described herein.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。Wherein, all relevant content of each step involved in the above-mentioned method embodiment can be referred to the function description of the corresponding function module, and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能模块可以集成在一个处理器中,也可以是单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上模块集成在一个模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。The division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation. In addition, each functional module in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into a processing In the controller, it can also be physically present separately, or two or more modules can be integrated into one module. The above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software function modules.
图10示出了一种通信装置1000的结构示意图。其中,通信装置1000可以应用于网络设备,或者是网络设备中的装置,能够实现本申请实施例提供的方法中网络设备的功能;通信装置1000也可以是能够支持网络设备实现本申请实施例提供的方法中网络设备的功能的装置。通信装置1000可以应用于终端设备,或者是终端设备中的装置,能够实现本申请实施例提供的方法中终端设备的功能;通信装置1000也可以是能够支持终端设备实现本申请实施例提供的方法中终端设备的功能的装置。通信装置1000可以是硬件结构、软件模块、或硬件结构加软件模块。通信装置1000可以由芯片系统实现。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。FIG. 10 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1000 . Among them, the communication device 1000 can be applied to a network device, or a device in the network device, which can realize the function of the network device in the method provided by the embodiment of this application; the communication device 1000 can also be able to support the network device to implement the A means of functioning in a network device. The communication device 1000 can be applied to a terminal device, or it can be a device in the terminal device, which can realize the functions of the terminal device in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application; the communication device 1000 can also be able to support the terminal device to implement the method provided in the embodiment of the present application A device that functions as a terminal device. The communication device 1000 may be a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module. The communication device 1000 may be implemented by a system on a chip. In the embodiment of the present application, the system-on-a-chip may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
通信装置1000可以包括收发模块1001。The communication device 1000 may include a transceiver module 1001 .
收发模块1001可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中向终端设备发送控制信息的步骤。还可以执行向终端设备发送第一配置信息,以及向终端设备发送第二配置信息,向终端设备发送N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元,以及从终端设备接收第二HARQ应答信息等。收发模块1001还可以用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1001用于通信装置1000和其它模块进行通信,其可以是电路、器件、接口、总线、软件模块、收发器或者其它任意可以实现通信的装置。The transceiver module 1001 may be configured to execute the step of sending control information to the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 . It is also possible to perform sending the first configuration information to the terminal device, sending the second configuration information to the terminal device, sending the transmission units respectively carried by N physical shared channels to the terminal device, and receiving the second HARQ response information from the terminal device, etc. The transceiver module 1001 may also be used to support other processes of the techniques described herein. The transceiver module 1001 is used for the communication device 1000 to communicate with other modules, and it may be a circuit, device, interface, bus, software module, transceiver or any other device capable of realizing communication.
可选的,通信装置1000还包括处理模块1002。在图10中以虚线框示意处理模块1002是可选的。Optionally, the communication device 1000 further includes a processing module 1002 . In Fig. 10, the processing module 1002 is indicated by a dashed box, which is optional.
示例性的,处理模块1002可以用于控制收发模块1001执行相应的步骤,还可以用于确定控制信息等,还可以用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。Exemplarily, the processing module 1002 may be used to control the transceiver module 1001 to execute corresponding steps, may also be used to determine control information, and may also be used to support other processes of the technologies described herein.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。Wherein, all relevant content of each step involved in the above-mentioned method embodiment can be referred to the function description of the corresponding function module, and will not be repeated here.
本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可 以有另外的划分方式,另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能模块可以集成在一个处理器中,也可以是单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上模块集成在一个模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。The division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation. In addition, each functional module in each embodiment of the present application can be integrated into a processing In the controller, it can also be physically present separately, or two or more modules can be integrated into one module. The above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software function modules.
如图11所示为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1100,其中,通信装置1100可以是图4所示的终端设备,或者通信装置1100可以是图5所示的第一终端设备。其中,通信装置1100可以为芯片系统。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。FIG. 11 shows a communication device 1100 provided in this embodiment of the present application, where the communication device 1100 may be the terminal device shown in FIG. 4 , or the communication device 1100 may be the first terminal device shown in FIG. 5 . Wherein, the communication device 1100 may be a system on a chip. In the embodiment of the present application, the system-on-a-chip may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
通信装置1100包括至少一个处理器1101,用于实现或用于支持通信装置1100实现本申请图4所示的终端设备,或者通信装置1100可以是图5所示的第一终端设备的功能。示例性地,处理器1101可以接收控制信息,具体参见方法示例中的详细描述,此处不做赘述。The communication apparatus 1100 includes at least one processor 1101 for realizing or supporting the communication apparatus 1100 to implement the terminal device shown in FIG. 4 of this application, or the communication apparatus 1100 may be the function of the first terminal device shown in FIG. 5 . Exemplarily, the processor 1101 may receive the control information, for details, refer to the detailed description in the method example, and details are not repeated here.
通信装置1100还可以包括通信接口1102,用于通过传输介质和其它设备进行通信,从而用于通信装置1100和其它设备进行通信。示例性地,该其它设备可以是服务器。处理器1101可以利用通信接口1102收发数据。The communication device 1100 may further include a communication interface 1102 for communicating with other devices through a transmission medium, so that the communication device 1100 communicates with other devices. Exemplarily, the other device may be a server. The processor 1101 can use the communication interface 1102 to send and receive data.
通信装置1100还可以包括至少一个存储器1103,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器1103和处理器1101耦合。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式,用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。处理器1101可能和存储器1103协同操作。处理器1101可能执行存储器1103中存储的程序指令。所述至少一个存储器1103中的至少一个可以包括于处理器1101中。当处理器1101执行存储器1103中的程序指令时,可以实现图6所示的实施例中任一的通信方法。另外,图11的通信装置还可以实现图9中的通信装置的功能。The communication device 1100 may also include at least one memory 1103 for storing program instructions and/or data. The memory 1103 is coupled to the processor 1101 . The coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or a communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules. The processor 1101 may cooperate with the memory 1103 . Processor 1101 may execute program instructions stored in memory 1103 . At least one of the at least one memory 1103 may be included in the processor 1101 . When the processor 1101 executes the program instructions in the memory 1103, any communication method in the embodiments shown in FIG. 6 may be implemented. In addition, the communication device in FIG. 11 can also implement the functions of the communication device in FIG. 9 .
作为一个示例,图11中的存储器1103为可选的部分。例如,存储器1103与处理器1101耦合设置。As an example, the memory 1103 in FIG. 11 is an optional part. For example, the memory 1103 is coupled with the processor 1101 .
本申请实施例中不限定上述通信接口1102、处理器1101以及存储器1103之间的具体连接介质。本申请实施例在图11中以通信接口1102、处理器1101以及存储器1103之间通过总线1104连接,总线在图11中以粗线表示,其它部件之间的连接方式,仅是进行示意性说明,并不引以为限。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图11中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。In this embodiment of the present application, a specific connection medium among the communication interface 1102, the processor 1101, and the memory 1103 is not limited. In the embodiment of the present application, in FIG. 11, the communication interface 1102, the processor 1101, and the memory 1103 are connected through the bus 1104. The bus is represented by a thick line in FIG. 11, and the connection mode between other components is only for schematic illustration , is not limited. The bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus and so on. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 11 , but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
在本申请实施例中,处理器1101可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器、专用集成电路、现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件,可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。In this embodiment of the application, the processor 1101 may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, or a discrete hardware component, and may implement Or execute the methods, steps and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application. A general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the methods disclosed in connection with the embodiments of the present application may be implemented by a hardware processor, or by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
在本申请实施例中,存储器1103可以是非易失性存储器,比如硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD)等,还可以是易失性存储器(volatile memory),例如随机存取存储器(random-access memory,RAM)。存储器是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是电路或者其它任意能够实现存储功能的装置,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。In the embodiment of the present application, the memory 1103 can be a non-volatile memory, such as a hard disk (hard disk drive, HDD) or a solid-state drive (solid-state drive, SSD), etc., and can also be a volatile memory (volatile memory), For example random-access memory (random-access memory, RAM). A memory is, but is not limited to, any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer. The memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of implementing a storage function, and is used for storing program instructions and/or data.
如图12所示为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1200,其中,通信装置1200可以是图4所示的网络设备,或者通信装置1100可以是图5所示的第二终端设备。其中,通信装置 1200可以为芯片系统。本申请实施例中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。FIG. 12 shows a communication device 1200 provided in this embodiment of the present application, where the communication device 1200 may be the network device shown in FIG. 4 , or the communication device 1100 may be the second terminal device shown in FIG. 5 . Wherein, the communication device 1200 may be a system on a chip. In the embodiment of the present application, the system-on-a-chip may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
通信装置1200包括至少一个处理器1201、通信接口1202和至少一个存储器1203,当处理器1201执行存储器1203中的程序指令时,可以实现图6所示的实施例中任一的通信方法。其中,处理器1201、通信接口1202和存储器1203的实现形式可参照前文。本申请实施例在图12中以通信接口1202、处理器1201以及存储器1203之间通过总线1204连接,总线在图12中以粗线表示。另外,图12的通信装置还可以实现图10中的通信装置的功能。The communication device 1200 includes at least one processor 1201, a communication interface 1202, and at least one memory 1203. When the processor 1201 executes the program instructions in the memory 1203, any communication method in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 can be implemented. For implementation forms of the processor 1201, the communication interface 1202, and the memory 1203, reference may be made to the foregoing. In the embodiment of the present application, in FIG. 12 , the communication interface 1202 , the processor 1201 and the memory 1203 are connected through a bus 1204 , and the bus is represented by a thick line in FIG. 12 . In addition, the communication device in FIG. 12 can also implement the functions of the communication device in FIG. 10 .
作为一个示例,图2中的存储器1203为可选的部分。例如,存储器1203与处理器1201耦合设置。As an example, the memory 1203 in FIG. 2 is an optional part. For example, the memory 1203 is coupled with the processor 1201.
本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序,当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图6所示的实施例中任一的通信方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which is used to store a computer program. When the computer program is run on a computer, the computer can execute any of the embodiments shown in FIG. 6 . A method of communication.
本申请实施例中还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序包括程序指令,该程序指令当被计算机执行时,使得计算机执行图6所示的实施例中任一的通信方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product stores a computer program, the computer program includes program instructions, and when the program instructions are executed by a computer, the computer executes any of the embodiments shown in FIG. 6 . A method of communication.
本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,还可以包括存储器,用于实现图6所示的实施例中任一的通信方法,还可用于实现前述方法中网络设备或终端设备的功能,或者用于实现前述第一终端设备或第二终端设备的功能。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。An embodiment of the present application provides a chip system, the chip system includes a processor, and may also include a memory, which is used to implement any communication method in the embodiment shown in Figure 6, and can also be used to implement the network device or The function of the terminal device, or used to realize the function of the aforementioned first terminal device or the second terminal device. The system-on-a-chip may consist of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
本申请实施例提供的方法中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、用户设备或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,简称DSL)或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机可以存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,数字视频光盘(digital video disc,简称DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,SSD)等。The methods provided in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, network equipment, user equipment or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. integrated with one or more available media. The available medium can be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), optical media (for example, digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD for short)), or semiconductor media (for example, SSD).
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的精神和范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the application without departing from the spirit and scope of the application. In this way, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalent technologies, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (27)

  1. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized in that, comprising:
    接收控制信息,所述控制信息用于调度N个物理共享信道,所述控制信息包括第一字段,所述N个物理共享信道包括M个第一物理共享信道,所述N和所述M均为正整数;receiving control information, the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels, the control information includes a first field, the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels, and the N and the M are both is a positive integer;
    其中,在所述N等于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段承载第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述N个物理共享信道的调制与编码策略MCS;在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段承载第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示K个第二物理共享信道的第一混合自动重传请求HARQ进程信息,所述K为正整数,所述K个第二物理共享信道为所述N个物理共享信道中除了所述M个第一物理共享信道之外的物理共享信道。Wherein, when the N is equal to the M, the first field carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the modulation and coding strategy MCS of the N physical shared channels; In the case where the N is greater than the M, the first field carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ process information of the K second physical shared channels. The K is a positive integer, and the K second physical shared channels are physical shared channels except the M first physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述控制信息还包括码块组传输信息CBGTI,所述CBGTI用于指示所述N个物理共享信道重传的码组块CBG;所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the control information further includes code block group transmission information CBGTI, and the CBGTI is used to indicate a code block CBG for retransmission of the N physical shared channels; the method Also includes:
    接收第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置所述控制信息最大可调度的物理共享信道的个数;receiving first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels in the control information;
    根据所述CBGTI以及所述控制信息最大可调度的物理共享信道的个数,确定所述N的取值。The value of N is determined according to the CBGTI and the maximum number of schedulable physical shared channels in the control information.
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述控制信息还包括第一行索引,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the control information further includes a first row index, and the method further includes:
    接收第二配置信息,其中,所述第二配置信息用于配置时域资源分配列表,所述时域资源分配列表包括至少一个行索引,以及包括所述至少一个行索引中每个行索引指示的至少一个物理共享信道各自的时域资源信息,所述至少一个行索引包括所述第一行索引;receiving second configuration information, wherein the second configuration information is used to configure a time-domain resource allocation list, the time-domain resource allocation list includes at least one row index, and includes an indication of each row index in the at least one row index Respective time-domain resource information of at least one physical shared channel, the at least one row index includes the first row index;
    从所述时域资源分配列表中确定所述第一行索引所指示的物理共享信道的个数,确定所述N的取值。Determine the number of physical shared channels indicated by the first row index from the time domain resource allocation list, and determine the value of N.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述控制信息还包括M个第一物理共享信道的第一HARQ进程号,所述第一HARQ进程号用于确定所述M个第一物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号;所述第一HARQ进程信息包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein the control information further includes first HARQ process numbers of M first physical shared channels, and the first HARQ process numbers are used to determine the The respective HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels; the first HARQ process information includes:
    第二HARQ进程号,所述第二HARQ进程号用于指示所述K个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号;或,A second HARQ process number, where the second HARQ process number is used to indicate the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels; or,
    第二HARQ进程号的偏移量,所述第二HARQ进程号的偏移量是指所述K个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号分别相对于所述第一HARQ进程号的偏移量。The offset of the second HARQ process number, the offset of the second HARQ process number refers to the offset of the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process number respectively .
  5. 根据权利要求1-4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 1-4, characterized in that,
    在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述N个物理共享信道所承载的传输单元均为重传,且所述N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元的上一次传输所采用的MCS均相同,所述传输单元为传输块TB、码块CB或码块组CBG。When the N is greater than the M, the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels are all retransmissions, and the last transmission of the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels uses The MCSs are all the same, and the transmission unit is a transmission block TB, a code block CB or a code block group CBG.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段还承载如下信息中的一种或多种:The method according to claim 5, wherein when the N is greater than the M, the first field further carries one or more of the following information:
    所述K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的新数据指示符NDI,其中所述至少一个第二物理共享信道的NDI用于指示所述一个第二物理共享信道用于新传 或重传;或,A new data indicator NDI of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels, wherein the NDI of the at least one second physical shared channel is used to indicate that the one second physical shared channel is used for new or retransmitted; or,
    所述N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量,所述MCS索引的偏移量是用于指示所述N个物理共享信道上分别所承载的传输单元采用的MCS索引相对于上一次传输所述传输单元采用的MCS索引的偏移量;或,The offsets of the MCS indexes of the N physical shared channels, where the offsets of the MCS indexes are used to indicate that the MCS indexes adopted by the transmission units respectively carried on the N physical shared channels are relative to the last transmission the offset of the MCS index used by the transmission unit; or,
    所述K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的码块组刷新信息CBGFI,其中一个第二物理共享信道的CBGFI用于指示在所述一个第二物理共享信道上承载的传输单元是否与上一次传输的所述传输单元进行软合并。The code block group refresh information CBGFI of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels, where the CBGFI of one second physical shared channel is used to indicate the code block group refresh information carried on the one second physical shared channel Whether the transmission unit is soft-combined with the transmission unit transmitted last time.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述N大于所述M,且所述第一字段不承载所述N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量的情况下,所述N个物理共享信道上分别所承载的传输单元所采用的MCS索引均相同,且与所述N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元的上一次传输所采用的MCS相同。The method according to claim 6, wherein when the N is greater than the M, and the first field does not carry the offsets of the MCS indexes of the N physical shared channels, the The MCS indexes adopted by the transmission units respectively carried on the N physical shared channels are all the same, and are the same as the MCS adopted by the last transmission of the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels respectively.
  8. 根据权利要求1-7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-7, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收第三配置信息,所述第三配置信息用于配置第一解调参考信号DMRS;receiving third configuration information, where the third configuration information is used to configure the first demodulation reference signal DMRS;
    根据所述第一DMRS对所述N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元进行解调。Demodulate the transmission units respectively carried by the N physical shared channels according to the first DMRS.
  9. 根据权利要求1-8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述控制信息还包括第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述N个物理共享信道的冗余版本RV,所述第三指示信息包括N个比特,在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述N个比特分别用于指示所述N个物理共享信道的RV。The method according to any one of claims 1-8, wherein the control information further includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate the redundancy version RV of the N physical shared channels , the third indication information includes N bits, and when the N is greater than the M, the N bits are respectively used to indicate the RVs of the N physical shared channels.
  10. 根据权利要求1-9任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-9, wherein the method further comprises:
    根据所述N个物理共享信道的解码结果,分别确定N个第一HARQ应答信息,其中,所述N个第一HARQ应答信息的任意一个第一HARQ应答信息包含P比特,所述P比特中的任意一个比特用于指示对应物理共享信道所承载的一个传输单元进行的肯定应答ACK或否定应答NACK,所述P为正整数,所述传输单元为传输块TB、码块CB或码块组CBG;According to the decoding results of the N physical shared channels, respectively determine N first HARQ response information, wherein any first HARQ response information of the N first HARQ response information includes P bits, and the P bits Any one bit of is used to indicate the positive acknowledgment ACK or negative acknowledgment NACK of a transmission unit carried by the corresponding physical shared channel, the P is a positive integer, and the transmission unit is a transmission block TB, a code block CB or a code block group CBG;
    对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定,得到第二HARQ应答信息,所述空间绑定是对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息中的所述P比特中的同个位置上的比特进行逻辑与操作获得的,所述第二HARQ应答信息包括P比特;performing spatial bundling on the N first HARQ response information to obtain second HARQ response information, the spatial bundling being at the same position in the P bits in the N first HARQ response information obtained by performing a logical AND operation on the bits of , and the second HARQ response information includes P bits;
    发送所述第二HARQ应答信息。Send the second HARQ response information.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:接收第四配置信息,所述第四配置信息包括第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示是否对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息进行所述空间绑定;The method according to claim 10, further comprising: receiving fourth configuration information, the fourth configuration information includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate whether to configure the performing the spatial binding on the N first HARQ response information;
    所述发送所述第二HARQ应答信息,包括:若确定所述第四指示信息的取值为第一值,所述第一值指示对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息进行所述空间绑定,则发送所述第二HARQ应答信息;The sending of the second HARQ response information includes: if it is determined that the value of the fourth indication information is a first value, the first value indicates that the spatial bundling of the N pieces of first HARQ response information is performed. determined, then sending the second HARQ response information;
    所述方法还包括:若确定所述第四指示信息的取值为第二值,所述第二值指示不对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息进行所述空间绑定,则发送所述N个第一HARQ应答信息。The method further includes: if it is determined that the value of the fourth indication information is a second value, and the second value indicates that the space bundling is not performed on the N pieces of first HARQ response information, sending the N A first HARQ response message.
  12. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, characterized in that, comprising:
    发送控制信息,其中,所述控制信息用于调度N个物理共享信道,所述控制信息包括第一字段,所述N个物理共享信道包括M个第一物理共享信道,所述N和所述M均为正整数,在所述N等于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段承载第一指示信息,所述第一指示 信息用于指示所述N个物理共享信道的调制与编码策略MCS;在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段承载第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示K个第二物理共享信道的第一混合自动重传请求HARQ进程信息,所述K为正整数,所述K个第二物理共享信道为所述N个物理共享信道中除了所述M个第一物理共享信道之外的物理共享信道。sending control information, where the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels, the control information includes a first field, the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels, and the N and the M are all positive integers, and when the N is equal to the M, the first field carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the modulation and coding strategies of the N physical shared channels MCS: In the case where the N is greater than the M, the first field carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ of K second physical shared channels Process information, the K is a positive integer, and the K second physical shared channels are physical shared channels other than the M first physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述控制信息还包括码块组传输信息CBGTI,所述CBGTI用于指示所述N个物理共享信道重传的码组块CBG;所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 12, wherein the control information further includes code block group transmission information CBGTI, and the CBGTI is used to indicate the code block CBG for retransmission of the N physical shared channels; the method Also includes:
    发送第一配置信息,所述第一配置信息用于配置所述控制信息最大可调度的物理共享信道的个数。Sending first configuration information, where the first configuration information is used to configure the maximum number of physical shared channels that can be scheduled by the control information.
  14. 根据权利要求12或13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 12 or 13, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第二配置信息,其中,所述第二配置信息用于配置时域资源分配列表,所述时域资源分配列表包括至少一个行索引,以及包括所述至少一个行索引中每个行索引指示的至少一个物理共享信道各自的时域资源信息,所述至少一个行索引包括第一行索引,所述控制信息包括所述第一行索引,所述第一行索引用于指示时域资源分配列表中指示的物理共享信道的个数。Sending second configuration information, where the second configuration information is used to configure a time-domain resource allocation list, the time-domain resource allocation list includes at least one row index, and includes an indication of each row index in the at least one row index The time-domain resource information of at least one physical shared channel, the at least one row index includes a first row index, the control information includes the first row index, and the first row index is used to indicate time-domain resource allocation The number of physical shared channels indicated in the list.
  15. 根据权利要求12-14任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述控制信息还包括M个第一物理共享信道的第一HARQ进程号,所述第一HARQ进程号用于确定所述M个第一物理共享信道各自的HARQ进程号;所述第一HARQ进程信息包括:The method according to any one of claims 12-14, wherein the control information further includes first HARQ process numbers of M first physical shared channels, and the first HARQ process numbers are used to determine the The respective HARQ process numbers of the M first physical shared channels; the first HARQ process information includes:
    第二HARQ进程号,所述第二HARQ进程号用于指示所述K个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号;或,A second HARQ process number, where the second HARQ process number is used to indicate the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels; or,
    第二HARQ进程号的偏移量,所述第二HARQ进程号的偏移量是指所述K个第二物理共享信道的HARQ进程号分别相对于所述第一HARQ进程号的偏移量。The offset of the second HARQ process number, the offset of the second HARQ process number refers to the offset of the HARQ process numbers of the K second physical shared channels relative to the first HARQ process number respectively .
  16. 根据权利要求12-15任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 12-15, characterized in that,
    在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述N个物理共享信道所承载的传输单元均为重传,且所述N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元的上一次传输所采用的MCS均相同,所述传输单元为传输块TB、码块CB或码块组CBG。When the N is greater than the M, the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels are all retransmissions, and the last transmission of the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels uses The MCSs are all the same, and the transmission unit is a transmission block TB, a code block CB or a code block group CBG.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段还承载如下信息中的一种或多种:The method according to claim 16, wherein when the N is greater than the M, the first field further carries one or more of the following information:
    所述K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的新数据指示符NDI,其中所述至少一个第二物理共享信道的NDI用于指示所述一个第二物理共享信道用于新传或重传;或,A new data indicator NDI of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels, wherein the NDI of the at least one second physical shared channel is used to indicate that the one second physical shared channel is used for new or retransmitted; or,
    所述N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量,所述MCS索引的偏移量是用于指示所述N个物理共享信道上分别所承载的传输单元采用的MCS索引相对于上一次传输所述传输单元采用的MCS索引的偏移量;或,The offsets of the MCS indexes of the N physical shared channels, where the offsets of the MCS indexes are used to indicate that the MCS indexes adopted by the transmission units respectively carried on the N physical shared channels are relative to the last transmission the offset of the MCS index used by the transmission unit; or,
    所述K个第二物理共享信道中的至少一个第二物理共享信道的码块组刷新信息CBGFI,其中一个第二物理共享信道的CBGFI用于指示在所述一个第二物理共享信道上承载的传输单元是否与上一次传输的所述传输单元进行软合并。The code block group refresh information CBGFI of at least one second physical shared channel among the K second physical shared channels, where the CBGFI of one second physical shared channel is used to indicate the code block group refresh information carried on the one second physical shared channel Whether the transmission unit is soft-combined with the transmission unit transmitted last time.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述N大于所述M,且所述第一字段不承载所述N个物理共享信道的MCS索引的偏移量的情况下,所述N个物理共享信道上分别所承载的传输单元所采用的MCS索引均相同,且与所述N个物理共享信道分别所 承载的传输单元的上一次传输所采用的MCS相同。The method according to claim 17, wherein when the N is greater than the M, and the first field does not carry the offsets of the MCS indexes of the N physical shared channels, the The MCS indexes adopted by the transmission units respectively carried on the N physical shared channels are all the same, and are the same as the MCS adopted by the last transmission of the transmission units carried by the N physical shared channels respectively.
  19. 根据权利要求12-18任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 12-18, wherein the method further comprises:
    发送第三配置信息,所述第三配置信息用于配置第一解调参考信号DMRS,所述第一DMRS用于对所述N个物理共享信道分别所承载的传输单元进行解调。Sending third configuration information, where the third configuration information is used to configure a first demodulation reference signal DMRS, and the first DMRS is used to demodulate transmission units respectively carried by the N physical shared channels.
  20. 根据权利要求12-19任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述控制信息还包括第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述N个物理共享信道的冗余版本RV,所述第三指示信息包括N个比特,在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述N个比特分别用于指示所述N个物理共享信道的RV。The method according to any one of claims 12-19, wherein the control information further includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate redundancy versions RV of the N physical shared channels , the third indication information includes N bits, and when the N is greater than the M, the N bits are respectively used to indicate the RVs of the N physical shared channels.
  21. 根据权利要求12-20任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:接收第二HARQ应答信息,其中,所述第二HARQ应答信息包含P比特,所述第二HARQ应答信息是对N个第一HARQ应答信息进行空间绑定得到的,所述N个第一HARQ应答信息是根据所述N个物理共享信道的解码结果确定的,所述空间绑定是对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息中的所述P比特中的同个位置上的比特进行逻辑与操作获得的,所述N个第一HARQ应答信息的任意一个第一HARQ应答信息包含P比特,所述P比特中的任意一个比特用于指示所述N个物理共享信道中的对应物理共享信道所承载的一个传输单元进行的肯定应答ACK或否定应答NACK,所述P为正整数,所述传输单元为传输块TB、码块CB或码块组CBG。The method according to any one of claims 12-20, further comprising: receiving second HARQ response information, wherein the second HARQ response information includes P bits, and the second HARQ response information The information is obtained by spatially bundling the N first HARQ response information, the N first HARQ response information is determined according to the decoding results of the N physical shared channels, and the spatial bundling is the The bit in the same position of the P bits in the N first HARQ response information is obtained by performing a logical AND operation, and any first HARQ response information of the N first HARQ response information contains P bits, so Any one of the P bits is used to indicate a positive acknowledgment ACK or a negative acknowledgment NACK performed by a transmission unit carried by a corresponding physical shared channel among the N physical shared channels, the P is a positive integer, and the transmission A unit is a transport block TB, a code block CB or a code block group CBG.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:发送第四配置信息,所述第四配置信息包括第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示是否对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息进行所述空间绑定;The method according to claim 21, further comprising: sending fourth configuration information, the fourth configuration information includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate whether to configure the performing the spatial binding on the N first HARQ response information;
    接收第二HARQ应答信息,包括:若所述第四指示信息的取值为第一值,所述第一值指示对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息进行所述空间绑定,则接收所述第二HARQ应答信息;Receiving the second HARQ response information includes: if the value of the fourth indication information is a first value, and the first value indicates that the space bundling is performed on the N pieces of first HARQ response information, then receiving the The second HARQ response information;
    所述方法还包括:若所述第四指示信息的取值为第二值,所述第二值指示不对所述N个第一HARQ应答信息进行所述空间绑定若所述第四指示信息的取值为第二值,则接收N个所述第一HARQ应答信息。The method further includes: if the value of the fourth indication information is a second value, the second value indicates not to perform the spatial bundling on the N first HARQ response information; if the fourth indication information is the second value, then N pieces of the first HARQ response information are received.
  23. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括收发模块,所述收发模块具体用于:A communication device, characterized in that the communication device includes a transceiver module, and the transceiver module is specifically used for:
    接收控制信息,所述控制信息用于调度N个物理共享信道,所述控制信息包括第一字段,所述N个物理共享信道包括M个第一物理共享信道,所述N和所述M均为正整数;receiving control information, the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels, the control information includes a first field, the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels, and the N and the M are both is a positive integer;
    其中,在所述N等于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段承载第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述N个物理共享信道的调制与编码策略MCS;在所述N大于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段承载第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示K个第二物理共享信道的第一混合自动重传请求HARQ进程信息,所述K为正整数,所述K个第二物理共享信道为所述N个物理共享信道中除了所述M个第一物理共享信道之外的物理共享信道。Wherein, when the N is equal to the M, the first field carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the modulation and coding strategy MCS of the N physical shared channels; In the case where the N is greater than the M, the first field carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ process information of the K second physical shared channels. The K is a positive integer, and the K second physical shared channels are physical shared channels except the M first physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels.
  24. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括:A communication device, characterized in that the communication device includes:
    收发模块,用于发送控制信息,其中,所述控制信息用于调度N个物理共享信道,所述控制信息包括第一字段,所述N个物理共享信道包括M个第一物理共享信道,所述N和所述M均为正整数,在所述N等于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段承载第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述N个物理共享信道的调制与编码策略MCS;在所述N大 于所述M的情况下,所述第一字段承载第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示K个第二物理共享信道的第一混合自动重传请求HARQ进程信息,所述K为正整数,所述K个第二物理共享信道为所述N个物理共享信道中除了所述M个第一物理共享信道之外的物理共享信道。A transceiver module, configured to send control information, where the control information is used to schedule N physical shared channels, the control information includes a first field, and the N physical shared channels include M first physical shared channels, so The N and the M are both positive integers, and when the N is equal to the M, the first field carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate the N physical shared channels The modulation and coding strategy MCS of the MCS; in the case where the N is greater than the M, the first field carries the second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first mix of K second physical shared channels Automatic repeat request HARQ process information, the K is a positive integer, and the K second physical shared channels are physical shared channels except the M first physical shared channels among the N physical shared channels.
  25. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:处理器和存储器;所述存储器用于存储一个或多个计算机程序,所述一个或多个计算机程序包括计算机执行指令,当所述通信装置运行时,所述处理器执行所述存储器存储的所述一个或多个计算机程序,以使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1-11中任一项所述的方法,或者执行如权利要求12-22中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that it includes: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store one or more computer programs, and the one or more computer programs include computer-executable instructions. When the communication device is running, The processor executes the one or more computer programs stored in the memory, so that the communication device executes the method according to any one of claims 1-11, or executes the method described in claims 12-22. any one of the methods described.
  26. 一种芯片系统,其特征在于,所述芯片系统包括:A chip system, characterized in that the chip system includes:
    处理器和接口,所述处理器用于从所述接口调用并运行指令,当所述处理器执行所述指令时,实现如权利要求1-11中任一项所述的方法,或者执行如权利要求12-22中任一项所述的方法。A processor and an interface, the processor is used to call and run instructions from the interface, when the processor executes the instructions, it implements the method according to any one of claims 1-11, or executes the method described in any one of claims 1-11 The method of any one of claims 12-22.
  27. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-11中任一项所述的方法,或者执行如权利要求12-22中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes any one of claims 1-11. The method described in the item, or carry out the method as described in any one in the claim 12-22.
PCT/CN2022/111677 2021-08-26 2022-08-11 Communication method and apparatus WO2023024915A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110987590.1 2021-08-26
CN202110987590 2021-08-26
CN202111298540.9 2021-11-04
CN202111298540.9A CN115733599A (en) 2021-08-26 2021-11-04 Communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023024915A1 true WO2023024915A1 (en) 2023-03-02

Family

ID=85292473

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/111677 WO2023024915A1 (en) 2021-08-26 2022-08-11 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115733599A (en)
WO (1) WO2023024915A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104303578A (en) * 2013-05-07 2015-01-21 华为技术有限公司 Method, Apparatus And System For Processing Data Transmission
CN110958698A (en) * 2018-09-27 2020-04-03 华为技术有限公司 Information indication method and device
CN112438068A (en) * 2019-03-28 2021-03-02 捷开通讯(深圳)有限公司 Transmission block scheduling method
WO2021062870A1 (en) * 2019-10-02 2021-04-08 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and apparatus

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104303578A (en) * 2013-05-07 2015-01-21 华为技术有限公司 Method, Apparatus And System For Processing Data Transmission
CN110958698A (en) * 2018-09-27 2020-04-03 华为技术有限公司 Information indication method and device
CN112438068A (en) * 2019-03-28 2021-03-02 捷开通讯(深圳)有限公司 Transmission block scheduling method
WO2021062870A1 (en) * 2019-10-02 2021-04-08 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and apparatus

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
NOKIA, NOKIA SHANGHAI BELL: "Corrections on Industrial IoT", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2003141, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG1, no. e-Meeting; 20200420 - 20200430, 11 May 2020 (2020-05-11), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051882962 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115733599A (en) 2023-03-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6860891B2 (en) Method for partial retransmission
KR102356204B1 (en) Communication method and communication device
TWI530144B (en) Method of handling communication operation and related communication device
WO2021159974A1 (en) Feedback method and device for hybrid automatic repeat request information
CN106899390B (en) HARQ transmission-based method, device and system
US11728931B2 (en) Communication method, network device, and terminal
WO2021012727A1 (en) Data transmission method and device, and storage medium
WO2020143731A1 (en) Method for transmitting data, communication device and network device
WO2019242711A1 (en) Method and device for generating hybrid automatic repeat request (harq) information
US20200389277A1 (en) Indication method, network device, and user equipment
WO2018133860A1 (en) Data transmission method, device, and communication system
KR20200004373A (en) Transmission method, terminal device and base station
WO2022142814A1 (en) Method and apparatus for processing code block on basis of hybrid automatic repeat request
US20220400467A1 (en) Method for determining physical sidelink feedback channel resource and apparatus
WO2021013026A1 (en) Data unit transmitting method and receiving method, and devices
WO2015013965A1 (en) Method and device for configuring data transmission resource
WO2022040964A1 (en) Method for generating hybrid automatic repeat request (harq) codebook, and apparatus
WO2022237424A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2018228553A1 (en) Data transmission method, network device and terminal device
WO2023024915A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2021227981A1 (en) Information sending method, and device
WO2021035541A1 (en) Data transmission method and related device
WO2019228241A1 (en) Signal processing method and apparatus
WO2022150976A1 (en) Semi-persistent schedule feedback method and apparatus, device, and storage medium
WO2023273754A1 (en) Hybrid automatic repeat request feedback method and apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22860261

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE